JP2022168200A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can improve the resistance of noise caused by electromagnetic wave noise.

SOLUTION: Wiring which is strong in electromagnetic wave noise compared with wiring which is wired in a groove-outside space formed of a metal-made wiring groove 1605, and also wired in a groove-inside space formed of the metal-made wiring groove 1605 is arranged at an inner face of a bottom part of a groove part 1605a of the metal-made wiring groove 1605 facing an electromagnetic noise generation source side having a cross-section U-shape, and wiring wired in the groove-outside space formed of the metal-made wiring groove 1605 is arranged at an outer face 1605d of the bottom part of the groove part 1605a of the metal-made wiring groove 1605 not facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side having the cross-section U-shape. By this constitution, the wiring wired in the groove-outside space formed of the metal-made wiring groove 1605, and the wiring wired in the groove-inside space formed of the metal-made wiring groove 1605 can be mixedly arranged in a space which receives an influence of the electromagnetic wave noise.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 249

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, the main control board that controls the game progress and game profit, the sub-control board that controls the effects that are executed as the game progresses, and the image control board that controls the display of the image display device, etc. are on the back side. There has been proposed a game machine in which various wiring members are routed around while being arranged in the space (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-217381 A (paragraph [0051], and FIG. 2)

By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are drawn around the game machine because they are charged with static electricity by rubbing against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls for various wirings.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving resistance to electromagnetic wave noise.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine for playing a game, comprising: a conductive member; a first wiring member that is vulnerable to electromagnetic noise; The second wiring member is disposed on one surface of the conductive member facing the noise source side, and the first wiring member is disposed on the other surface of the conductive member not facing the electromagnetic wave noise source side. A gaming machine characterized by placing.

This game machine is capable of playing a game, and includes a conductive member, a first wiring member, and a second wiring member. The conductive member has conductivity. The first wiring member is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. The second wiring member is more resistant to electromagnetic noise than the first wiring member.

A second wiring member is disposed on one surface of the conductive member facing the electromagnetic noise source side, and a first wiring member is disposed on the other surface of the conductive member not facing the electromagnetic noise source side. A wiring member is arranged.

In this way, the second wiring member, which is more susceptible to electromagnetic noise than the first wiring member, is arranged on one side of the conductive member facing the source of electromagnetic noise, and is more sensitive than the second wiring member. The first wiring member, which is vulnerable to electromagnetic noise, is arranged on the other side of the conductive member that does not face the electromagnetic noise source side, so that the first wiring member and the first wiring member are in the space affected by the electromagnetic noise. The second wiring member can be mixedly arranged. Therefore, it is possible to improve noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise.

In this embodiment, for example, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the game machine, and the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249 corresponds to the second wiring member, The bottom inner surface of groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. Bottom outer surface 1605d corresponds to the other surface of the conductive member.

(Solution 2)
A game machine according to solution 1, characterized in that the game machine is a reel-type game machine.

In the game machine of the present invention, since the game machine is a reel-type game machine, the effect of the solution means 1 can be obtained in the reel-type game machine. As a basic configuration of the reel-type gaming machine, after variably displaying a pattern information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings attached with a plurality of pattern information) consisting of a plurality of pattern information, the display result of the pattern information is stopped and displayed. In addition to having variable display means, the variable display of pattern information is started based on the operation of the operation means for starting (eg, starting lever), and based on the operation of the operation means for stopping (eg, stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time. to stop the variable display of the pattern information. Then, there is provided profit giving state generation means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and medals are used as game media to generate the profit giving state. It is configured so that a large amount of medals are sometimes paid out.

(Solution 3)
A game machine according to the solution 1, characterized in that the game machine is a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine are combined.

In the game machine of the present invention, since the game machine is a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine, in the fusion game machine that combines the pachinko game machine and the reel-type game machine, The effect of the solution 1 is obtained. As a basic configuration of a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine, a pattern information string consisting of a plurality of pattern information (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of patterns) is displayed in a variable manner. Later, a variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the pattern information is provided, and the variable display of the pattern information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the starting lever), and the stop operation means (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped. Then, there is provided a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and a game ball is used as a game medium to generate the profit giving state. It is constructed such that a large number of game balls are put out when it occurs.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front; (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Fig. 101(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side; 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque; FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 as seen from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 1 is a front view of a game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107; It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a back perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit. It is a left side view of a starting mouth unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general prize-winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of the variable prize-winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when it is exploded and viewed from the front; It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the 1st attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st big prize-winning entrance door in a 1st attacker unit from left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in a 1st attacker unit in a cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the middle right side unit, and the gate member in the front unit. is a perspective view of the from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the path of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit. FIG. 115 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 ; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of a game board with a transparent door frame; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-side effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-side perspective view of the back-side effect unit in the back unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the rear back production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back production|presentation unit from a front. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a back production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 142. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back rear movable decoration body, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back rear movable decoration. FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with broken lines; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a). FIG. 143(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the region of the first LED, and (b) is a second LED positioned on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the arrangement of , from the front. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is a figure and (c) is an enlarged sectional view which shows a part of decoration which has the metal decoration part of a different form from (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment, which is different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back decoration of the third embodiment. FIG. 11C is an explanatory view showing the configuration of 1 in a cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the rear movable decorative body of the fourth embodiment in a cross section. (a) is a front perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a perspective view of a lower back left effect unit and a lower back right effect unit in the back unit. is a perspective view. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit when viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of a back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-side lifting mechanism of the bottom-side effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the underside decoration unit of the underside effect unit, viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle lifting mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is a stop position of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit from the front. (a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back side effect unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevation decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit, which is viewed from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back upper raising/lowering decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows from the front the rotation mechanism of the back top front rotary decoration in a back top production|presentation unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit; It is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back-up rear rotary decoration. FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state where the upper back elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the upper back effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the rear left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the rear left decorative body unit of the rear rear left effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back left decorative body unit in the back left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back perspective view of a back rear right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the back-right production unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear-right decoration unit of the rear-right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decorative body unit of the rear rear right effect unit exploded and viewed from the rear; It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back right production|presentation unit from the front. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decorative body unit in the back-right effect unit; (a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left effect unit, viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the closed state in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the open state in the back front left effect unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit, viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right effect unit exploded and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-lower middle rotary ornament of the back-lower middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back upper rear rotating decoration of the back upper rear effect unit moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating ornament of the back rear left effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back rear right effect unit moves from the retracted position to the first appearance position It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-right rotating decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position. A state in which the back-left rotating decoration of the back-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in . It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit, respectively, from the closed state to the open state. Back rear movable decoration of the back rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, Back left rotating decoration of the back left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back bottom middle rotation decoration of the back bottom middle production unit is raised from the lowered position. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved to respective positions; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-standing support member. It is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the body frame. Figs. (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, showing a small DIP-type connector electrically connected to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. 4D to 4F are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of . FIG. 209(a) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and FIG. 209(b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification in which the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance; FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram (a) of an over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. FIG. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213, which is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line YY. FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 215 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the shape of a solid ground at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, showing the copper foil on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; 1A is a schematic view of the surface, and FIG. 1B is a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view along line XX of FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment; 224 according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment; FIG. 225 is a view on the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment; Taking out the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board for good contact between the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method, a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (exposed example (a)), and a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (exposed example (b)). , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), and a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (through holes having lands). It is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the attachment procedure, such as a peripheral control board, which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing lands formed around through holes on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to a fourth embodiment, and FIG. A view (a) showing a land formed around a through-hole on the back (solder side) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to a fourth embodiment, a view (b) showing a land and screw designation symbols, and a foil extraction area It is a figure (c) which shows . FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. (a) shows a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen in the same figure. It is a figure (b) which shows a part of back perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut off by the CL line in (a). It is a continuation of FIG. 238 and is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit with a part of the peripheral control unit cut off so that the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged front view of a cover body that constitutes a peripheral control unit having openings into which tip portions of contact probes according to a fifth embodiment can be inserted and brought into contact; Taking out the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate for good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment It is a figure showing a method, a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (a)), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (b)). , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (c) in which a plurality of through holes with lands are arranged), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through holes with lands) It is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. 1 is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable; FIG. Fig. (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and Fig. 3 (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. b), which is a partial enlarged view of the B section shown in (a) and the C section shown in (b), showing through the notch a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector; It is a figure (c). Fig. (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally to the connector on the back side of the effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state without. FIG. 2A is a view showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board, and FIG. It is a figure (c) which shows the state which the connector of wiring and harness is not connected normally. FIG. 245 is a modification of FIG. 245 and is a diagram (a) showing the layout of the connector of the relay board and the part arrangement line, showing a state in which the connector of the wiring and harness is normally connected to the connector of the relay board. FIG. (b) is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the connector of the wiring or harness is not properly connected to the connector of the relay board. FIG. 10A is a partial perspective view of the game board as seen from the back, explaining the area where the wiring grooves are attached, and FIG. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and shows a state where the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board; FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing various wiring states when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production|presentation unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production|presentation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the light emission production|presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the light emission production|presentation unit, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows the arrangement|positioning relationship of an LED bare chip and a light-guide plate. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of the light guide plate; FIG. 4A is a view showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in FIG. FIG. (b) shows a state in which the insertion is normal, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing an abnormal state in which the flexible flat cable is not sufficiently inserted into the connector of the LED board. (c). 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B (see FIG. 90) are driven by.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for putting out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501 are covered. A back cover 640 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing movable effects and light emitting effects according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game ball B, and a predetermined privilege given to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. General winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate section 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, and second big winning opening 2006 that provide (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) and have. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁A general winning opening 2001 , a first starting opening 2002 , a gate section 2003 , a second starting opening 2004 , a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000 .

A game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 by the player. As a result, the game ball B enters the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , the player can be entertained with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be received or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a reverse effect unit 3100, a reverse effect unit 3100, or a Left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, back front right effect The unit 3800 or the like can be used to entertain the player by performing a lighting effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. 16 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged from the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain board rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame and viewed from above, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recessed portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and the outer frame upper hinge member 51. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to hit into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery thereof, and is close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and are arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 83). and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position near the upper end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical gap therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The notch portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31-33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 . The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1i. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the tamper-proof member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. As a result, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the discharge solenoid 542 by the discharge control section 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

When the player presses downward the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the operation transmission portion 242b moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmission part 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the inlet 141a and the ball removal opening 141b. partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proof member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b facing each other are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-tamper member 148 so that the right end in a front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. As shown in FIG. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this tampering prevention member 148, an illicit game ball B to which a string is attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illicit game ball B. When a fraudulent act is performed such as operating the string that has been set to let the illegal game ball B enter and exit the first starting port 2002, etc., the illegal game ball B shot (hit ball) by the ball launching device 540 is released. By force, the string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the portion with a narrowed shape, and it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act using a fraudulent game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 36(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been shot by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. It is for guiding the game ball B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, through which the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200 are communicated. A ball passage 150a and a full ball receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and can communicate with a lower full discharge passage 610b of a lower full ball passage unit 610 of the body frame 4. and a mouth 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and even though the ball is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4, it does not reach the game area 5a. A foul ball receiving port 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B received by a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving port 150c which are open forward near the lower right corner in front view. and a ball discharge port 150d that discharges the balls forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200. - 特許庁

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three groove portions 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a protrudes outward from the portion protruding most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (gouged out) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface in the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cover 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The steering wheel cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the steering wheel decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right hit"), the fourth projection 182d is the first projection 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by switching the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. To reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular performance operation ring 330 having a rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁

[3-5a. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes to the right in front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the production operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 44 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5c-1. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in the shape of a shallow box with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the plate lower right decorative board 288. , and the operation unit relay board 392 . The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and operates a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. (omitted)), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed. or return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the game balls B borrowed.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and an upper right plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower front portion of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . Further, the lower tray main body 251 has a bottom surface positioned below the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211 in a state assembled with the tray unit 200, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is used to supply the lower tray balls. It is positioned in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the upper left and lower plate decoration units 270 and 280, respectively, and the upper right and lower right plate decoration units 275 and 280, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 when assembled on the door frame 3. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a, a step can be formed in which the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his finger using the step between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side protrusion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. Alternatively, it can be used as a finger hold when operating an effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. In addition, the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are continuous with the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 are caused to emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and it is possible to make it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5e-3. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface portions 336a that protrude upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. and an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the performance operation unit, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the contents of the player participation type presentation according to the direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape in which a ring is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decoration board 352a on the front side and a rear decoration board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to present the player with a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5e-7. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more diverse effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 62(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, and a central hole 364b that penetrates vertically. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 . The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the state where the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When the effect operation unit 300 is assembled into the effect operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 has a pressing operation part 303 arranged in a ring of the rotary operation part 302, and the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302 is larger than the upper surface of the rotary operation part 302, as shown in FIG. 65(a). It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the central pressing operation portion 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation portion 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation portion 303 may hinder the rotation operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. FIG. 66(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 66(b) is a back perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end thereof is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the top door frame unit 450 and the top decoration body 453 of the door frame. is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of the

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. FIG. 69(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 69(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window trims 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side inner panel 417 formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412 a of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 . A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the edge of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. Fig. 72(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from above and front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from below and front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively.

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the lateral outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip plate extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the respective mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. Fig. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is positioned within the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for hitting a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and the payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a substrate unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. a rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable; and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and extending leftward in an upwardly open groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 according to instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides to the board unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. (a) to (c) of FIG. 84 are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). (see FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that opens to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove portion 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball launching device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the shooting rail 544 and hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that if the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From the gap, the ball drops into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a front-rear width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a; and a rear side of the top plate portion 551a. and a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and a rear plate portion 551b extending from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the vicinity of the lower end with a substantially constant width to the right. A back plate left portion 551e, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front portion of the lower side of the left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f are provided. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the end on the first rail cover 554 side is arranged around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end in a front view so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 in front view on the top surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551 . The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main body frame base 501 . A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. As shown in FIG.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and the ball pull out lever 593 is operated from the ball pull out passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit A game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. ball guidance unit]
The ball guide unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a back cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, and a spur-gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 , a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispenser main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and the second transmission gear 587 meshes with the second transmission gear 587. and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and protruding into the payout passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 is provided.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a.

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The body-side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three outwardly extending flat detection pieces 588b at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 has a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 90).

When the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, moves to the ball extraction movable piece 592. and flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper disbursed ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (discharged) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of the Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth, and A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are connected to the upper full ball passage. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d passes through the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627 opened leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in the state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are supplied from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state and are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 93(b) is a back perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a speaker cover 621 facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. and a container-like speaker box 623 that is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and that opens forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the lower outer frame assembly 40 side is communicated through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through-cylinder 623a extending in a tubular shape communicating with the through-hole 621d and penetrating back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guide portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball ejection port 629 for ejecting downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 97) and The payout control board 633 activates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. It is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward to the rear of the body-frame speaker 622 . The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 101(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. . The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the place where the ball is jammed can be specified quickly. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the effects of

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the horizontal direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. and has an opening 552k penetrating in the vertical direction. The ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )is doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 such that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a step-like manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting caught due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being varied, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 occurs. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, Since the game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which front components, game panels, front units, etc. are made opaque. 108 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board with the front constituent members, the game panel, the front unit, etc. made transparent. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the CC line in FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decoration substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate, the LED emits light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decoration substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second start-up opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. 2006, etc., to perform a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be received or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape.

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116, etc.) attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 according to the command from the panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. It is provided with an effect drive board 1720 that drives a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc., and a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 . The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first big prize winning opening 2005, a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. A second big prize winning opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the 2004.例文帳に追加

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 that discharges the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the vertical direction in the game area 5a and the game ball B is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging from inside the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. a first attacker unit 2400, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and a center role A second attacker unit 2600 provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and having a second large winning opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and one Equipped with a side right center unit 2700 having a general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003. there is

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010, which has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010; a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have it.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 2010 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient for two game balls B to be aligned in the horizontal direction. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, and is discharged to the rear of the front structural member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component member 1000 is formed transparently together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 is made transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 115, etc.).

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 2010 at its upper portion. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out-ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 to be described later is inserted into the out recess 1123 .

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, the boundary of the game area 5a can be reduced from being clearly visible. It is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting portion 1201 is positioned directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is positioned outside the back unit 3000. It is positioned directly below the ball detection member 3080 . The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000, and discharges them from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving part 628 below. can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first big winning opening sensor 2402, and a second big winning opening. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out-port sensor 2403, the second sub-out-port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the results of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display consisting of one LED, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B in the gate part 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first big prize winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of five LEDs displaying

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 . A plurality of L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a are formed on the back side of the protective cover body 1601 along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 to hold various wirings. A plurality of holes are formed in alignment vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the horizontal direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601b protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1601c protruding downward from the lower end surface. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward to insert the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 117(b) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B struck into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 Different from the first big winning hole 2005 and the first big winning hole 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball B. The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A second big prize winning port 2006 is provided.

A plurality (here, four) of the general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part in the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 2010 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end in the front view in the game area 5a at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 . The second big prize winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second start-up port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general prize winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the playing area 5a, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit provided on the left side of the side unit 2200 and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 is provided on the right side of the starter unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view, and has a second starter outlet 2004, a first big prize-winning outlet 2005, and a first sub-outer outlet 2011. and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006, and a second attacker unit 2600. A side right center unit 2700 provided above and having one general prize winning port 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right center unit 2700 provided above the side right center unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003 and a gate member 2800 that is in contact with.

[5-8a. starting unit]
Starting unit 2100 of table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. Figure 118 (a) is a front perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of the starter unit and side unit in the front unit, and (c) ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general prize winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing parts of the starter unit and the side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starter opening unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction is provided, and the whole is formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which a rectangular portion elongated in the left and right direction and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord are combined when viewed from the front. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, and the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110 form a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B. forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is formed. located just below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall part 2102 in a state attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in . The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although illustration is omitted, a decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that it is more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be encouraged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002.例文帳に追加At the same time, by allowing the game ball B to be accepted in the first start port 2002, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state such as a "jackpot" game is generated in which the player is advantageous is drawn. Therefore, it is possible to heighten expectations for the result of the special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a looser angle (an angle close to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

120, when the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear lower middle production unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is positioned behind the rear lower middle production unit 3300, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LEDs of the first lower-side decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower-side decorative substrate 3329 of the lower-side inner decoration unit 3320 is used for decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the starting port unit 2100 , a rib may be provided that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002 . This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part of which may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface of the rib is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. In addition, the distance from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is made longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203. (the rib is positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 abuts the rib and is guided backward is It is possible to delay the timing of contacting the slanted portion and being guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general prize winning opening 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat plate-shaped base plate, and extends forward and backward from the base plate in the shape of a gutter. One induction gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end sides of the two first induction gutters, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate on the left side of the two first induction gutter. and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is made entirely of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed to the upper left. The front end of the first guide trough 2202 extends vertically from the upper part of the first guide gutter 2202 at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom, and the lower part moves backward toward the base plate 2201 as it goes downward. extends obliquely to Accordingly, the first front wall portion 2203 closing the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 closing the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201 .

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . Then, the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 can receive the game ball B. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 protruding rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064 . The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then It is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 .

The side unit 2200 differs from the starter opening unit 2100 in that no decorative stickers are attached to the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205 that form the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001. It is made less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002 . In addition, since the front ends of the two general prize-winning ports 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general prize-winning ports 2001 can be emphasized. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitted from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for luminous decoration, and the back-bottom-left-rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has an inclined portion on the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general prize winning openings 2001, the portion on the lower left side of the back unit 3000 is inclined by this portion. The light emitted forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, It can make you look better.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is faster. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100 . Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B disappears in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being unnecessarily long with respect to the general winning opening 2001, while ensuring that the player recognizes that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, and continuously It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game in the game area 5a and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In other words, the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 that is bent and extends obliquely is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the start opening unit 2100. The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 can be seen for a longer period of time. The reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be surely recognized, and the joy (feeling of superiority) for the reception of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 can be felt through the general winning hole 2001. can be savored for a longer period of time than when it is received by the

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 can be seen from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It is possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part of the . When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front. Since the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel distrustful of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the slanted portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are received in the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short period of time, the player can recognize that the game ball B has been received in the general prize winning opening 2001 . Therefore, even if the game ball B passing in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is mistakenly received in the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass through the front of the first front wall portion 2203, When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view, the game ball B may not enter the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. The illusion of acceptance can be provided, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side even if the benefits (payout of the game ball B and lottery of the first special lottery result) are not given after that. This allows the player to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 out of the three general winning openings 2001 parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001 at the left end, some players can be given the illusion that it has been received in the starting hole. Even if the game ball B is accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 which is mistaken as the starting opening, the lottery for the special lottery result is not performed, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrustful. There is fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 away from the first start opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be accepted by "right hitting"), and the second Since no decorative sticker indicating the starting opening is attached to the front surface of the front wall part 2205, the player can be reconfirmed that it is not the starting opening, and the player feels a sense of suspicion, thereby increasing interest in the game. You can avoid dropping it.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 slanted, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced because no decorative seal is attached to the front surface of the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加

Although not shown, the angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general prize-winning port 2001) from the horizontal is such that variable prize-winning ports such as the big prize-winning port and the accessory prize-winning port can be opened and closed. The angle of inclination from the horizontal is larger than that of the winning opening door when it is opened by rotating about the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B into the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. I want to win a prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the inclination of the variable winning opening door gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slowed down. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be seen for a longer time. 2001 can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole, and can give the general winning hole 2001 the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted in the variable winning hole. It can be savored for longer than when it is received. In addition, since the angle of the prize winning port door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the prize winning port door in the open state to close, so that more than a prescribed number of game balls B win a prize for the player. can make you think to

In addition, in the two right side general winning holes 2001 in the side unit 2200, the portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, although the game ball B is paid out, a lottery such as a normal lottery or a special lottery is not performed. can be made out of the player's field of view early on.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general prize winning port 2001 among the plurality of general prize winning ports 2001 is shown with an inclined front surface. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball B that is shot to the shooting position (so-called "left shot") in the normal game state can enter the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided at the position is shown, it is not limited to this. It may be provided at a position where the game ball B launched to the shooting position (so-called "right shot") can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having the inclined front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from the closed state. It has a narrow angle. When the number of game balls B to be paid out at the time of winning a prize in the big prize-winning port is set larger than that of the general prize-winning port 2001, the player cannot win more than the prescribed number of prizes even in the big prize-winning port where the prescribed number of prizes is determined. I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that has entered the big winning opening rolls to the back is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won in the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is inclined rolls to the back. there is In other words, when winning the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning the big winning opening, the game ball B that has won the big winning opening is faster than the speed when it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the larger the payout amount, the longer it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, the more payouts a winning opening can provide, the longer the joyful time when winning a prize can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Side upper left unit 2300 in table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right. The side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[5-8d. 1st Attacker Unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a front perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 121(b) is a back perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the first attacker unit.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is positioned in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second start opening 2004 is provided on the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big prize winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second start opening 2004. It is provided at a low position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a first start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2402, a first sub-out hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out hole 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. Two each of the first big prize winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path for the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. a rear cover 2413 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004; a start solenoid 2415 for starting, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the start solenoid 2415, a first grand prize winning door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first grand prize winning port 2005, A first attacker solenoid 2418 for opening and closing the first major winning opening 2005 by moving the first major winning opening door 2417, and transmission for moving the first major winning opening door 2417 by transmitting forward/backward movement of the first attacker solenoid 2418. a member 2419;

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413 and attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large prize winning opening decoration substrate 2420 for decorating the first large winning opening 2005 with light emission. Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board and a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying connection with 1710 .

The unit base 2411 is made of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating in the front-rear direction near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating in the front-rear direction below the first opening 2411a, and A second opening 2411c that is long in the left-right direction and penetrates in the front-rear direction in the upper part on the left side of the center; and a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right widths are slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted. Each of the second guide holes 2411d protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape and is inclined so that the rear end side thereof is lowered.

The unit base 2411 is arranged horizontally along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two triangular contact portions 2411e projecting forward. These abutting portions 2411e allow the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big winning port door 2417 to contact with the abutting portion of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning port 2005 is closed. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

A second starting opening sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411 . Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big winning hole sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes are aligned. Magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box-like shape that is open rearward, and is formed as a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game balls B on the front surface of the unit base 2411 . As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the upper right corner to the left and a game ball extending leftward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. It extends shorter than the first shelf portion 2412a so as to be lower leftward from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a and is spaced slightly longer than the diameter of B, and between the first shelf portion 2412a The second shelf portion 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf portion 2412b so as to be lower left than the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b and lower than the diameter of the game ball B. A third shelf portion 2412c extending shorter than the portion 2412b, and a space of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B to the left from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c. and a fourth shelf portion 2412d that extends lower leftward from a lower position than the third shelf portion 2412c and forms the first big winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is away from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf portion 2412a, the second shelf portion 2412b, and the third shelf portion 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf portion 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf portions 2412a and so on. ing.

In addition, the front cover 2412 has a first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to a height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. A fourth vertical wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side of the front cover 2412, a fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and a right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. and a seventh standing wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower leftward. , further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . In addition, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower rightward. It extends upward and further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412 . The horizontal interval between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting lower ends of a first standing wall portion 2412e, a second standing wall portion 2412f, and a third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, after inclining to the left to leave an interval where the game ball B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l, to the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h on the left. and a second lateral wall portion 2412m that slopes upward. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. The second lateral wall portion 2412m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has an extending third lateral wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposing ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lower leftward, and the space between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c allows the game ball B to circulate. are set apart. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Also, the upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lower rightward.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has a triangular shape at the front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and alternately in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two rearwardly projecting abutments in shape. When the first big prize winning port 2005 is in the closed state, these abutting portions move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. Together, they circulate in a large zigzag fashion in the front-rear direction.

The rear cover 2413 is shaped like a box that opens forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big prize winning door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. In addition, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting door 2414 includes a flat plate-like door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. and a connecting portion 2414d provided at a portion apart from the rotating shaft 2414c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2414b and connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with a door portion 2414a. The second starter door 2414 rotates (turns) about a rotating shaft 2414c by advancing and retreating the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The first big prize winning opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from the left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the horizontal direction, and a columnar link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower portion of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c in the lower portion of the arm portion 2417b. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

The first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with a door portion 2417a. As the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (turns) about the rotary shaft 2417c, thereby moving the door portion 2417a in the front-rear direction. The first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is mounted so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes faces forward. The plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown) when not energized, and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and penetrating in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension portion 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big winning opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first prize winning opening decoration board 2420 . A plurality of LEDs of the first big prize winning opening decoration board 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first big prize winning hole decoration board 2420 can light-embellish the first big prize winning hole 2005 by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

In the normal state of the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2415 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starter door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It's becoming That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first big prize winning port door 2417 is positioned above the first big prize winning port 2005, and the door portion 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first big prize winning port 2005. It is in a good state. That is, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning entrance door 2417 according to its momentum, and is tilted to the left due to their inclination. roll in the direction In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter the

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is, with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412, They come into contact with each other alternately, and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the door portion 2417a rolls on the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and is then released to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, whereupon the second horizontal wall Due to the inclination of the part 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, it passes through between the third vertical wall portion 2412g and the fourth vertical wall portion 2412h, and the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It drops near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, and reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (turned on) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger moves against the urging force of the spring. retreats, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. By rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls onto the first lateral wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the inclination causes the game ball B to roll backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When this transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 slides in the slit 2419c and is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c. It will happen.

As a result, the first big prize winning opening door 2417 rotates about the rotating shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first large prize winning port door 2417 rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first large prize winning port 2005 is opened upward, and the first large prize winning port 2005 opens. A game ball B can be accepted (see FIG. 124). That is, the first big prize winning opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is received in the first large prize winning port 2005 when the first large prize winning port 2005 is in an open state, the fifth vertical wall after passing between the fifth vertical wall portion 2412i and the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j. Passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o, or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, and after being detected by one of the two first prize winning opening sensors 2402, the second It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined downward from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B dropped on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged rearward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is transferred to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first large prize winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first large winning opening 2005 By rotating the door portion 2417a centering on the rotating shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front and rear direction as the first big prize winning port 2005 (the first big prize winning port 2005 The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414 . Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is released backward, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from stagnation between the first big prize hole 2005 and the first big prize hole sensor 2402, and to increase the number of game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127 and the like. FIG. 126(a) is a front perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit, and FIG. 126(b) is a rear perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, and the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward until the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5 . Moreover, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110 into which the center accessory 2500 is inserted. This peripheral wall part 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 to the inside of the frame in a state assembled to the game board 5 .

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502 ) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 . The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501 . In addition, the support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a linear shape, so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thereby exerting a reinforcing effect while allowing the player to It is made to be inconspicuous from.

More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes most to the left above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is midway between the vertically extending portions. has a shape that bulges out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges leftward. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). The support part 2503 of this part is the back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 in which the part extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support part 2503 is provided in the back in the state assembled to the game board 5. 3030 along part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, the support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively small. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made conspicuous.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a rectangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends obliquely. The support part 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the assembled state on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107, etc.). ). The laterally extending tip side of the support portion 2503 extends parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. , and the support portion 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, at the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is open in the frame on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1100 so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 can be released, and the game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the horizontal direction, and a stage cover 2515 provided to cover the upper side of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127, etc.). The stage cover 2515 bounces back the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 to the stage 2513 side, thereby preventing the game ball B from entering from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 into the frame.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the starter unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is positioned on the panel board of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) so that when it is attached to 1110, the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion (central release portion 2513a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a guide passage group 2520 which is provided in the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the impact of the front component 1000). It is almost in contact with the right rail 1005 near the part 1006 , and is formed so that the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520 .

The guide passage group 2520 has a length in the vertical direction that is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove that is open forward, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 away from the peripheral wall portion 2501 and a guide passage 2521 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall portion 2501. and a second guide passage 2522 extending along the The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated left and right. In addition, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are laterally adjacent to each other and open obliquely downward and to the right along the arc above the right rail 1005 .

The guide path group 2520 is positioned above the gate section 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5 . In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impinging portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have hit the impinging portion 1006 are first guided. It is configured to enter passageway 2521 .

Further, the center accessory 2500 protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and has a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening obliquely downward to the left with a width of one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in the state assembled to the game board 5 and is positioned between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600 . Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is located at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it becomes the outer edge, the inner side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be displayed through the frame of the center role 2500. The decoration of 3000 can be made more visible.

In addition, since the supporting portion 2503 projecting inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes short from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided behind the back. It is possible to reduce hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000, the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the like. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are positioned as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. is arranged, it is possible to suppress blurring of the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. - 特許庁For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body or the like provided in the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of emitting light decoration and the effect display device 1600, the light emitted from them can be used for the light emitting decoration, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support portion 2503 (the cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135). The LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the light emitted forward from the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, or diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. can be shown to the player. It should be noted that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step or the like can diffuse the light from the rear, thereby making the display more gorgeous.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is provided a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. In the near portion, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501 . As a result, the game area of the plurality of obstacle nails N can be made as wide as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the original game.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support part 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, compared to the case where the support part 2503 is provided over the entire circumference, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further expanded. It can be widened, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear can be made more visible. In other words, if the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 is to be made to look larger, the support portion 2503 is provided along a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided behind in a front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may be formed in the same shape as the front cover 3711 (decorative shape) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided on the rear side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. can increase

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700, which are provided at the rear, so that these decorations are displayed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, it is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 away from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left effect unit 3700 may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

In the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating therethrough, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, this is not the case. However, the peripheral wall portion 2501 may have no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112. In this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Also, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support part 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center role 2500 is not provided with the flange part 2502. You can do it.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. 128(a) is a front perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory view showing a cross-section of a game ball path in the second attacker unit and the side middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of panel plate 1110 in panel 1100 . The second attacker unit 2600 has a second big prize winning opening 2006 openable to the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second large winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal timing acting near the second large winning hole 2006. 2602 and . In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second large winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006 and the second large winning opening door 2611 to close the second large winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second large winning opening door 2611, and the second large winning opening 2006 and a guide passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and releasing it backward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens leftward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, and a second large winning opening 2006 that closes the second large winning opening 2006 from the left. A winning entrance door 2611 is provided.

The second big winning entrance door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a left side that bulges out from the upper end of the right side. and an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction around the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape, and a link projecting in a columnar shape rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. A pin (not shown) is provided. The second big prize winning opening door 2611 is attached so that the lower rotating shaft can rotate so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base portion attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 and extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second big winning opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 in the state assembled on the game board 5, and the peripheral wall portion of the second prize winning opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space in which the game ball B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 . In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5 , the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 .

In the normal state, the second attacker unit 2600 has the second attacker solenoid 2612 in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second large prize winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second large winning prize opening 2006 is closed by the second large winning prize opening door 2611 . In other words, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big winning hole 2006.例文帳に追加

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the second When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (turned on), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second big winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member pulls up. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big winning opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotating shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second large prize winning opening door 2611 moves leftward, the second large winning prize opening 2006 opens leftward, and the right end side of the second large winning prize opening door 2611 becomes low. It will be in a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the falling game ball B abuts on the second big winning gate door 2611 , it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is received by the second big winning gate 2006 . The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, then guided by the guide passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released rearward from the guide passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129 and the like. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a and attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . This side right middle unit 2700 is provided with one general prize winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012 .

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward with a width of one game ball B in the left and right direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the left and right direction is the game ball. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width of two spheres B.

In addition, the side right center unit 2700 includes a first guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and a second guide passage 2701 that guides backward the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2012. two guide passages 2702; The first guide path 2701 extends rearward from the general prize winning opening 2001, bends rightward, and further bends rearward to form a crank shape. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 more than the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

In this side right center unit 2700, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. there is

In addition, the side right center unit 2700, in a state assembled on the game board 5, has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000, and a lower end substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, Between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, a space is formed in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right center unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 130, etc.).

The side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3051 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guide passage 2702, and then the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 at 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 128 and the like. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right center unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 for performing a lottery for the ordinary lottery result that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes through, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801 and . A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate portion 2003 .

The gate member 2800 has a guiding piece 2802 projecting obliquely downward to the left from near the right end of the bottom surface. The guiding piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes through the vicinity of the left end of the general prize winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700 in the state assembled to the game board 5 .

The gate member 2800 is positioned substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front structural member 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and is positioned on both left and right outer sides of the game board. A gap is formed through which the sphere B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the right above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115, 130 and the like. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in both the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W for the game ball B struck on the left side of the center role 2500.例文帳に追加, and is adjusted to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability. As a result, the game ball B can enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center role 2500 .

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more difficult than the game ball B which has circulated through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that has passed through the second guide path 2522 on the left side of the guide path group 2520 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are mainly adjusted so that the game balls B flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side thereof. ing.

A plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 .

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and hit upward along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is hit so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W has a lower probability than these. induced to enter the

The game ball B guided to the left part of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf part 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200 . Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted in the three general prize winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then is guided to the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064 , and after being detected by the general prize winning slot sensor 3051 , it is ejected onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, the privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. A game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002 . Then, the game ball B that has not been received by the general winning hole 2001 is discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the horizontal direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted into the first starting port 2002 . In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize gate 2001 of

A game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512 . The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is detected by the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game ball B is detected by the first starting hole sensor 3052, a lottery for the first special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, or is received by the second starting port 2004, the first big prize winning port 2005, and the second big prize winning port 2006. There is no possibility of being taken.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center role 2500 is accepted in the second start opening 2004 is higher than that of the game ball B hit to the left side of the center role 2500 The probability of being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is not open, it is possible to prompt the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hitting").

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is moved with such a force that the game ball B enters above the portion of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly rightward from the position just above the gate portion 2003 .

A game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caught by a plurality of obstructing nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800 are guided so that the probability decreases in order, and flow down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 emitted downward from The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide path 2522 is guided such that the probability of the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 is substantially the same, and the probability of the right side of the gate member 2800 is lower than them. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012 . The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, the second sub-out port sensor After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Also, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right center unit 2700 after being detected by the gate sensor 2801 . When the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery for a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

A game ball B passing through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of hitting the side right center unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery opening 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, After being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 , it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

A game ball B flowing down the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. flows down the left side of

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006 is detected by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and after being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, the game ball B in the back unit 3000 The substrate is transferred to the seventh transfer port 3067 of the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 . When the game balls B are detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided.

The game ball B, which was not accepted in the second big prize-winning hole 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second big prize-winning hole 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guide passage 2530. to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 downward (diagonally lower left) flows down onto the first shelf 2412 a of the first attacker unit 2400 . In addition, since a plurality of obstructing nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf portion 2412b. After rolling, it is released leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and the inclination of them After rolling leftward from the door portion 2417a to the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may reach the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a by coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It may run down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf portion 2412p rolls leftward due to its inclination, is released leftward from the left end of the upper shelf portion 2412p, and hits the obstacle nail N planted leftward. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first grand prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d roll leftward and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first big winning opening 2005 opens, It may be accepted in the winning slot 2005 .

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it bounces rightward due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing upward, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. As shown in FIG. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. , and discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the passing of the game ball B through the gate part 2003 results in the lottery of "ordinary hit" as the ordinary lottery result, the second start. Since the opening door 2414 is moved and the second start opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is accepted by the second start opening 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received by the second starting hole 2004, it is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a lottery for the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Also, when the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery As a result, when a "big hit" is drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the ball is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first big winning hole 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game balls B are detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, by contacting the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, it flows down diagonally to the right and the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412b. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.例文帳に追加

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged downward behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 is made to receive the game ball B, and "small win". It is necessary to draw a lottery for the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to allow the game ball B to pass through the gate part 2003 to draw a "normal hit" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the chances of receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 are lower than the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the player hits the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received by the first starting port 2002 and the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first start port 2002 can be enjoyed. It can raise expectations for the acceptance of

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first start opening 2002, and a "small hit" or "big hit" is drawn as a result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be received in the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2006, and the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 to increase the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage for circulation facilitates passage through the gate section 2003. , the second sub-out port 2012 can be easily received, so that the game ball B can be adjusted in striking strength so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide passage, and the game ball B can be adjusted to the player. B's driving operation can be enjoyed.

In addition, by performing "right hitting", by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the second start opening 2004 is in an open state "normal hit" may be drawn, and the open state To increase the expectation for a game and to suppress the decrease in interest because a ``small win'' or a ``big win'' may be drawn by receiving a game ball B in a second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加can be done.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. 131 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 132 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the back wall and having a box shape with an open front. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 is provided.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat plate-like back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat plate-like back front right decorative body 3040 provided below the front end inside the back box 3010. a back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010; a back bottom left effect unit 3200 and a back bottom right effect unit 3250, and a back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part inside the back box 3010, and a back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. a back rear left effect unit 3500, a back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration 3040 in the back box 3010, and a back front left decoration 3030 and back rear left A back front left effect unit 3700 provided between the effect unit 3500 and a back front right effect unit provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800 and .

[5-9a. back box]
The back case 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 . In the back box 3010, a back front left decoration 3030, a back front right decoration 3040, and various production units are installed, and a production display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are installed on the rear side. The back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601b of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A cutout portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorations, production units, etc., at appropriate positions.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031 . The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 , and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041 . The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 . Although illustration is omitted, the decoration sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the game area 5a in a front view when assembled on the game board 5. (See FIGS. 111 and 135, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outside, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. extended to

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in a front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is positioned halfway from the bottom of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It is extended to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward beyond the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 .

As a result, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the back front left decorative body 3030 (the shaded portion in FIG. The elevation drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (the hatched portion in FIG. 135). Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3 can make the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 invisible from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and in the state assembled to the game board 5, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is extended. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it to the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered with the door frame 3 and hidden. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from being unnecessarily large, thereby pachinko. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front, the function display unit The back front left decorative body 3030 can be used instead of 1400 to hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in a front view, and has a transparent front. Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. , and effects similar to those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least part of the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided on the rear side are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts hard to see from the player side, and to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided in the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 make it possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, thereby giving the player a sense of openness and the actual game area 5a. Although the size does not change, it is possible to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are decorated with a predetermined decoration, are located outside the game area 5a. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through them, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated with them, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, so that the game can strongly attract the player's interest. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, the front component member 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (toward the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be displayed, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided in the rear can be accessed from the player side by the portions of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 that are extended outside the game area 5a. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, part of the functional parts are placed outside the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be large with respect to the size of the game board 5. It is desirable to have

Moreover, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a appear larger than it actually is and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a front perspective view of a back guide unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape such that both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, An out-port sensor 3053 for detecting the game ball B received in the out-port 2010, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. and a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a portion behind the and detects an illegal magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 is received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 through which the game ball B is delivered, a third delivery port 3063 through which the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 on the middle side of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. A fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B received in the winning port 2001 is delivered, and a fourth delivery port 3064 where the game ball B accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 where the game ball B received in the first large winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second large winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 A seventh delivery port 3067 where the received game ball B is delivered, an eighth delivery port 3068 where the game ball B accepted by the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is delivered, and the side right middle unit 2700 A ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050, although not shown in detail, guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it obliquely to the lower right, and a position below the sixth delivery port 3066 for the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 and a fourth discharge path for guiding the liquid to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharging the liquid obliquely downward to the left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. be done. A game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are played. The ball B joins with the second discharge path and is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning opening 2001 . The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general prize winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and transferred to the fifth delivery port 3065, and the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B accepted by the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general prize winning port 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is upstream of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, then merges with the fourth discharge path, It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 is provided with an out ball detecting member 3080 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. To detect the game balls B received in the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not receive the privilege (game balls B to which no privilege was given, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, and includes a tubular portion 3081 extending in the front-rear direction so that the game ball B can flow, and the tubular portion 3081. A partition portion 3082 that divides the interior into left and right, a flange portion 3083 projecting in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is positioned downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). Out ball detection member 3080 is provided with out opening sensor 3053 between cylindrical portion 3081 and rear cover 3084 .

The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction that allows two game balls B to be lined up sufficiently (a width that does not allow three game balls B to line up), and a lower inner surface It slopes down toward the rear. The partition part 3082 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end of the cylinder part 3081, and is partitioned into a size through which one game ball B can pass on both left and right sides. The front end of the partition 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out-ball detection member 3080, two out-hole sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B that circulates on the left side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the tubular section 3081. It detects a game ball B that has been distributed. The out port sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081 . As a result, the circulation direction of the game ball B circulating in the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the outlet sensor 3053, so the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053. can be discharged quickly to prevent it from staying in front of the outlet sensor 3053 .

This out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, and the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

When the out-ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out-guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081 . Also, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 .

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide portion 1003 and is received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detecting member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharged ball receiving portion 628 of the body frame 4 without contacting the board holder 1200 .

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, the partition 3082 separates the two out-hole sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, so that the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is detected. The game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the right side of the out sensor 3053 side while being guided to the left side of the out side sensor 3053 . Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left" or "hit right" according to the number of game balls B detected per hour by the left and right outlet sensors 3053, respectively. Based on the determination, it is possible to encourage the player to perform the most suitable driving operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out-ball detection member 3080, the forward projection of the partition part 3082 is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over, so when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per time, the partition is detected. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged at the out port 2010 without delay.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning hole 2006, the first sub-out hole 2011, and the second sub-out hole 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 is reversed by the out ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out hole sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000 , but the configuration is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100 . At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123 can be supported. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.例文帳に追加

In addition, according to the present embodiment, it is driven into the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006 Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that has not been accepted by any of them can be detected by the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the game ball B is continuously detected in the mouth, but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a particular winning hole is being cheated. It is possible to report that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting "out balls", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by detecting the game ball B accepted in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the "ball output rate" of the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display section for displaying the "ball output rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

Also, in the game board 5, all game balls B ("whole ball") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all game balls B ("whole ball") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out-out sensor 3053, the first sub-out sensor 2403, and the second sub-out sensor 3054 detect only the "out ball". ” and “global ball”, it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 .

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a front perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 137(b) is a back perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-after effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the after-behind effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the movable structure of the back effect unit. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back effect unit.

The back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (the front surface of the back wall) in the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 has a U-shape opening downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010 . The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decoration body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a translucent decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3111 that is provided behind the decorative body 3111 and has a plurality of decorations on the front surface. It has a rear decoration substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114. - 特許庁A plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are full-color LEDs. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration substrate 3114 can light-embellish the decoration 3111 (back movable decoration 3110).

In addition, the back rear movable decoration 3110 includes a left slider 3116 vertically extending on the left side of the decoration 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decoration 3111 . The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near its lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding leftward from near its upper end in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided at its upper end. have.

The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front. A slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the back and rear movable decoration 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a slide shaft 3122 that extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. and a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and the motor gear 3125 as a rotating shaft. A rear rear drive motor 3126 attached, a motor base 3127 mounting the rear rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and an upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. A bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123 are provided.

In addition, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a slide guide 3130 which is screwed to a spiral shaft 3123 and can abut against the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decoration 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and is capable of moving up and down, the lower end of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131 a link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction due to the elevation of the link member 3133; It has

Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Attached front right cover 3138 and back rear drive motor 3126 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137, back rear upper detection sensor 3135, back rear lower detection sensor 3136 and connection of effect drive board 1720 and the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the connection between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138 and the back rear decoration board 3114 of the back rear movable decoration 3110 and the effect drive board 1720. and a back rear right relay board 3140 that is relayed.

The unit base 3121 has an impact absorbing member 3121a that abuts against the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 .

The slide guide 3130 has a detection piece 3130 a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end and is detected by a back rear bottom detection sensor 3136 . The slide guide 3130 is vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 , and is prevented from rotating about the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. The upper end surface of the slide guide 3130 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 . In addition, the slide guide 3130 has a lower surface that can be brought into contact with the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 .

The transmission slider 3131 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be vertically movable. A front left cover 3137 allows the transmission slider 3131 to move vertically only within a predetermined range. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding rightward at its lower end, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding rightward at its upper end, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Moreover, the transmission slider 3131 has a projecting pin 3131c slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 .

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to an upper projection 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, thereby urging the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 is formed in a triangular shape in which each vertex is R-chamfered when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable about the longitudinal axis. The link member 3133 has an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left vertex of the rotation axis, and an elongated slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the vertex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

Lock member 3134 is attached between unit base 3121 and front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by front left cover 3137 .
The locking member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end face, and extends in the left-right direction. The contact surface 3134b, which extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, and a guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be vertically slidable.

Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), the rear back effect unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is in a normal state. is positioned near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 is moved to the right and positioned at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the back movable decoration. The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 abuts.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 3132 . Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in the clockwise direction around the rotation shaft, and biases the lock member 3134 in the direction of sliding rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

In this state, the downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 . Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the corresponding position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining can prevent the downward movement (fall) of the back movable decorative body 3110. can.

Also, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is positioned above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The rear rear effect unit 3100 is located behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the retracted position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. move to Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134, so the movable back decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the rear-rear-lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower projection 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward while the back-rear-bottom detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the biasing force of the spring 3132 .

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projecting pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. As the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the transmission pin 3134a inserted into the second slit 3133b The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, the locking (downward regulation) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the back movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, which is moving downward, is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear rear bottom detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped rear back movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, thereby stopping the falling and being in the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is positioned below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back movable decoration 3110, and the back movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back-back effect unit 3100, the back-back movable decoration 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) in the appearance position where the back-back movable decoration 3110 has fallen. In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 to emit light. A player can be entertained by the luminous decoration.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is to be returned from the appearance position of the lower movement end to the retracted position in the normal state, the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the rear rear drive motor 3126. direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 . As the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

In addition, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower projection 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable projection 3116a upward. By pressing the back movable decorative body 3110 upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

Then, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b contacts the guide surface 3134c from below and pushes the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c exerts a force to move the lock member 3134 to the left. As a result, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the biasing force of the spring 3132 that moves rightward through the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133 .

When the locking projection 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking projection 3116b against the guide surface 3134c disappears. The lock member 3134 slides rightward by the biasing force of the spring 3132 to reach the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable decoration 3110, and the lock member 3134 prevents the back movable decoration 3110 from moving downward. can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear driving motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearing position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

According to the rear back effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right can be dropped from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the state of the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Back rear movable decoration]
Next, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 in the back-back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative substrate. 143(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 144(a) is a front perspective view of the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the movable rear decorative body as seen from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate in the front view of FIG. 147 with dashed lines. FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back rear movable decorative body, and (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the same part as the decoration of (a).

FIG. 150 is an enlarged sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 143(a). 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 exploded. FIG. 152 is an explanatory view showing the relation between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative substrate at the position of the first LED, and FIG. 153(b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. FIG. 10C is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate at the part where the light guide radiation plate is formed, and (c) is an LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the second decoration part of the decoration body and the decoration sheet, and the second decoration substrate behind the back It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of one LED from a front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the back decoration substrate together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the rear decorative substrate. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part with a form different from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion of a form further different from those of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 having a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends in a front view, and two first decorative portions 3151 arranged in the horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decorative parts 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative portions 3152 imitate predetermined characters, and are arranged in rows on the left and right to form a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 with relief-like unevenness. and a translucent sheet-like decorative sheet provided behind the decorative body 3111 and forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150 with a decoration (pattern) applied. 3112, a transparent plate-like light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. a flat plate-shaped decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back rear decoration substrate 3114; A left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111 are provided.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of the back-rear movable decorative body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from a general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111a. and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111 a is provided at a portion that forms the contours of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The first decorative projection 3111a in the first decorative portion 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, and on the central stamen and pistil imitating parts, respectively. . The first decorative projection 3111a at the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer circumference of each second decorative portion 3152 in a double (two-line) manner. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative projection 3111 b is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 . The second decorative projection 3111b is shaped like a cherry blossom or petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151 . The second decorative projection 3111b is curved such that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative projection 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 has a curved front surface. The third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 has a flat front surface.

The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute part of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 of the decorative portion 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster at a portion of the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes forward from the second decorative projection 3111b (first foil stamping region (see FIG. 156(a))). It has a metal decoration portion 3111d (a dark shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for the metal decoration portion 3111d. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment is provided on the curved front portion of the first decorative projection 3111a. is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can impart a sense of luxury. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative projection 3111a can be emphasized by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152, as shown in FIG. is made difficult to see from the front.

In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a and the like of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is emitted by the rear surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided in the rear, and the decoration (first outline portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by hot-stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of a hot stamping device with the front side where the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like protrude upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate whose lower surface side is elastic and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is lowered. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decoration portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decoration protrusion 3111b of the decoration body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decoration portion 3111d of the present embodiment has elasticity at the portion of the transfer sheet that contacts the decoration body 3111 to which the metal foil is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a) is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be kept in a good state even on a three-dimensional shape such as a curved surface. It can be transferred (foil stamped) with As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, the decoration body 3111 is provided with the metal decoration portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by a hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A decoration body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decoration portion 3111d at the tip portion of the portion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, in a state in which the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on the hot stamping device, the hot plate is first pressed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position (second foil stamping area FS2) that is lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the tip portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b Transfer metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a color different from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) to transfer the second metal foil to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration parts 3111d of different colors for the first decoration protrusion 3111a and the second decoration protrusion 3111b is formed without masking the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111. be able to.

Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative projection 3111a by laser light. Alternatively, a decoration body 3111 having a metal decoration portion 3111d on the first decoration protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decoration portion 3111d may be provided not only on the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also on the side surface thereof.

The decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is concave forward from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recessed portion 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 is made uniform by the recess 3111e after this, so that deformation due to shrinkage of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward at portions corresponding to the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, which will be described later. provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, and the light emitted from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is blocked by the gap. , the light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front causes the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111 . The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion immediately behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. This makes it difficult to see the attachment boss 3111f from the front (player's side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative projection 3111c is provided in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet for back movable decorative body]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decoration 3111 . The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern on the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. and a second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first decorative projections 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in duplicate on the decorative body 3111, a first light diffusing portion 3112c provided at a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative projection 3111a provided doubly on the decoration body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 (a portion behind the third decorative projection 3111c). and a diffusion portion 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided behind the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111. have.

The first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is a part where light interference fringes are displayed by a hologram. The first outline portion 3112a is formed opaque. In this embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 . In addition, the cherry blossom-like portion of the first contour portion 3112a is colored using white or pink. It should be noted that the ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may be one having glitter particles.

The first outline portion 3112a is located outside and behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration of the first contour portion 3112a and the metallic decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the perspective between the first outline portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be made difficult to perceive.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a is formed in bright gray or white on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the pattern and hologram on the front side. In addition, the light emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be reflected back to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white back surface of the first outline portion 3112a, so that the light guide radiation Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit brighter light, the amount of light radiated forward from the light-transmitting portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with more uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b of the decoration 3111, the rear surface of the decoration 3111 is flat except for the rear recess 3111e. located behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the design and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111. - 特許庁

As illustrated, the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape with a predetermined width. The second outline portion 3112b is positioned behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided in a double manner on the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the two gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b complements the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b) and the like, in the first light diffusing portion 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, the light from the center to the peripheral edge of the petal A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed so that the gradation becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusing portion 3112c emits light, the pear-skin pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c causes a slight Therefore, the luminous decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom can be given a three-dimensional effect.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine projections and depressions capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as indicated by light and shade hatching in FIGS. It is The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine unevennesses capable of disturbing light. A plurality of fine unevennesses forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits light, the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d emits a predetermined light. The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 is provided with a rear recessed portion 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 at the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d. state. Due to this gap, the light emitted from the front toward the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front is the primary light. The diffusion part 3112c and the second light diffusion part 3112d become bright. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear-back decorative substrate 3114 are not illuminated, the light from the front causes the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, that is, , a first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom and a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 forming a logo are brightened and easily visible from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is formed. The portion 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 constitutes the remainder. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first outline portion 3112a, the second outline portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear side of the transparent base sheet. there is The first outline portion 3112a and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Also, the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusion film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d may be lens films or prism films.

A transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 emits light from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative projection 3111a projecting forward, the metal decoration 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side faces remain transparent. The light irradiated to the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e can provide the player with a luminous decoration that looks like a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first outline portion 3112a located outside the first decorative projection 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transmission portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Therefore, the patterns and holograms provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram. The decoration of the back rear movable decoration 3110 can be made to look larger. Since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. At that time, the performance display device 1600 provided in the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the player can see the performance with a sense of unity, and the game is played. The visual impact can be given to the player to attract their attention, the large decoration can be enjoyed, and the decline in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above-described embodiment, the transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, the first outline portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decoration portion 3111d. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from becoming poor. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to the rear portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decoration body 3111 passes through the first decorative protrusion of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be used as the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiating plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent plate-like main body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body portion 3113a. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c that pass through the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED housing portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the peripheral edge of 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear edge of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c. .

The light guide radiation plate 3113 also has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a when viewed from the front.

The body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of the flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative substrate 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110 .

The first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner peripheral shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the region of the first decorative portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the region where the first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a darker shade of pink due to the dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is positioned closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom. The center of the long side of the rectangular inner periphery is positioned on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the second decorative portion 3152 are provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is For this reason, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Also, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 . Moreover, when the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. It is formed in a By connecting the first LED housing portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a portion thinner than the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is A part of the light is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c and passes through the first LED housing portion. 3113c will be radiated inside. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another inner peripheral surface, part of the light on the surface reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the main body 3113a. That is, in the interior of the main body portion 3113a, when the light that is guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, it is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side of the first LED housing portion 3113c. , the amount of light is greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

As such, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light that is about to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decoration part 3152 to be decorated with light emission, and it is possible to surely decorate only the desired second decoration part 3152 in the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 with light emission. .

More specifically, the operation of the first LED housing portion 3113c as described above is described. For example, as shown in FIG. In order to illuminate the decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. A first LED 3114a is provided so that the In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. is a single hole. As a result, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 does not have a thin portion that is easily damaged. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for decorating the "☆" placed below the "I" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is illuminated, there is a risk that the "I" provided above the "☆" will be illuminated. A first LED housing portion 3113c housing a first LED 3114a for decorating part of the letter "I" with light emission is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the top of the "☆". ing. The extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for luminous decoration of "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with light emission, "I" is not decorated with light emission. In addition, the extension 3113j can reduce (block) the light for luminous decoration of "I" from being guided to the "☆" side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably illuminated, and the desired rendering effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions resembling stamens provided around the center of the first decorative portion 3151 resembling a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms behind circular portions resembling stamens positioned on the center line of the petals. Thus, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates through the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside (within the plate thickness) of the main body portion 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is A portion of the light is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to diffuse into the inner side of the main body portion 3113a in a fan shape. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body portion 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d. The light can make the petals more brightly luminous and decorated.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in the shape of a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are formed on the rear surface of the body portion 3113a except for the portion of the flange portion 3113b, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed almost all over the surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect forward the light irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiating plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear when viewed from the front due to the existence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decoration part 3150 made up of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 is changed due to a change or the like, there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change or the like can be easily dealt with, and the cost is reduced. can be suppressed.

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the inserted first LED 3114a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface on the side of the first LED housing portion 3113c that is flush with the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Accordingly, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body portion 3113a can be widened, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted into the main body portion 3113a. can be done. When the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface of the leg portion 3113f abuts the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting forward the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to make the surface difficult to see and prevent the appearance from becoming poor. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward from the rear decorative substrate 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 extends from the rear decorative substrate. The creeping distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. You can prevent it from being lost.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed as holes passing through the main body portion 3113a. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the heat effect on the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are blocked by the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration body 3111, and the like. However, compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape) that does not penetrate, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. As a result, a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b can be mitigated, and the thermal influence on the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c that is closely connected to each other and the first LED housing portion 3113c that has the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, more heat can be radiated from the first LED 3114a, and a rapid temperature rise can be mitigated.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from behind. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be brought as close to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 as possible. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear ends of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113 a and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 . As a result, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed to prevent the influence of heat. can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is set from "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a" to "from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the second The distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a" is desirable. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114 . If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reduced, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and directs the light forward by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Since the light can be radiated forward, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion where the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided on the rear side of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, even if the rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the body portion 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the body portion 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body portion 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body portion 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer. By increasing the creeping distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-back decoration substrate of back-back movable decoration]
A plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 includes a flat board body 3114c, copper foils 3114d (see FIG. and an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film (not shown) made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a labeling portion near the mounted components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. have. The inscription portion is provided by silk printing in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous from above the coating film.

The rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and has a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between it and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, which will be described later. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. In other words, the rear decoration substrate 3114 is sized to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115 b of the decoration base 3115 .

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative projections 3111a of the decorative body 3111 are located on the central lines of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms at the locations of the first decorative portions 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a. It is provided so that the light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside (the metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, the first LEDs 3114a in the first decorative portion 3151 can light-embellish each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms.

In addition, at the part of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 It is provided near the rear of 3111a so that light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 . Thereby, the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be illuminated one by one by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 .

As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are arranged in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151, which resembles a cherry blossom. located at the rear. In other words, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151 . As a result, the five central stamen-like portions of the first decorative portion 3151 can be decorated with light emission by the second LEDs 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can irradiate light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, the part that imitates the stamen in the central part of the first decorative part 3151 is illuminated more than the other parts. It is possible to emit point light with high luminance, and to strongly attract the player's interest. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, it is possible to provide a portion that emits planar light from the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits point-like light from the second LED 3114b. A variety of lighting effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114 c is a rigid substrate slightly thinner than the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated inward from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL=1 mm in this embodiment). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance from the conductive member (for example, the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are increased, thereby discharging static electricity and the like. Insulation against short circuits can be enhanced, and damage to the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion within a predetermined distance, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is made as wide as possible. As a result, part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d. , and the electronic component 3114e can be prevented from being damaged by heat.

In addition, the rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined width for facilitating forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the substrate main body 3114c on the light emitting surface side of the side-view type first LED 3114a on the front side. (the area surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. (1) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is close to the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side can be easily reflected forward. can be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 153(a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since they are in contact with each other, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, the light (light amount) emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a), etc.). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface is worn or flipped due to contact with the leg portion 3113f, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. never. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulating properties, and damage due to short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 3113b and 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, thereby preventing the appearance from deteriorating. In addition, in a state in which the rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer circumference of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. In addition, the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 is damaged. can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to 10 mm or longer, or to a distance capable of supporting a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 allows a member provided behind the rear movable decorative body 3110 (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided behind, so that the decorative portion 3150 may be illuminated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from being overwhelmed, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emission effect on the rear movable decorative body 3110.例文帳に追加In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the rear decorative substrate 3114 can prevent the rear from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear movable decoration can be prevented. The deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from behind with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. LED driver ICs, resistors, and the like as the electronic parts 3114e are generally black parts. The appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply white or other color paint to the electronic component 3114e to make it difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base of back movable decorative body]
The decoration body base 3115 is formed transparent as a whole. The decoration base 3115 includes a plate-like cover plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decoration substrate 3114, a flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate portion 3115a, and a cover plate portion 3115a that extends through the cover plate portion 3115a. and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the covering plate portion 3115a in front view.

The covering plate portion 3115a has an outer peripheral shape that substantially follows the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a size that In other words, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. As shown in FIG. Since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered by the cover plate portion 3115a, it is possible to protect the rear decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative substrate 3114 from behind. It is possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 .

As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and extends forward beyond the rear decorative substrate 3114. protrudes so that the The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 difficult to see from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creeping distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from flowing to the rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is elongated in the left and right direction and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. The plurality of openings 3115c allow the heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to escape to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the thermal effect on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is reduced. can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 .

In addition, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of projections 3115e are arranged so as to abut on the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, near the outer periphery thereof, where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 into contact with the front surfaces of the plurality of protrusions 3115e. . As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main functions and effects of back-rear movable decorative body]
Next, main functions and effects of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 in this embodiment will be described. The back rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration. The mounting bosses 3111f of the decoration 3111 are attached to the decoration base 3115 while the back decoration substrate 3114 is sandwiched between the decoration base 3115 and the decoration base 3115 (see FIG. 143, etc.). As a result, the back movable decorative body 3110 has a relatively thin thickness in the front-rear direction.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 and a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting forward, Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first outline portion 3112a with the hologram that displays the pattern and the interference fringes of light, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 Thus, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can impart a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. and a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel thinness, and the decoration effect of the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 is sufficiently obtained. It can be displayed to entertain the player.

In addition, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can impart a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and the inside of the game board 5 can be positioned more effectively. By providing the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the pachinko machine 1 that entertains the players can be easily realized. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of providing a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance, providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining various performances, and being highly appealing to players and capable of further differentiation. can do.

The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be conspicuous due to the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be given a three-dimensional effect and a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the appearing position visible to the player, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that something good will happen, and to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111. , the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearing position, the performance display device 1600 provided on the rear side displays a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby playing a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to show the decorations to other people, to give a visual impact to the players to attract their attention, and to entertain the players with large decorations, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the interest of the players.

In addition, since the back rear movable decoration 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decoration 3111d of the decoration 3111 and the second outline portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112, the metal decoration 3111d and the second outline 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 are provided with the first LED 3114a. The two contoured portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, thereby suppressing deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 , and the second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission individually. As a result, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right sides can be illuminated in order, or only specific first decorative portions 3151 and second decorative portions 3152 can be illuminated, By properly lighting up the first decoration part 3151 and the plurality of second decoration parts 3152, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in interest. can.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in the direction along the surface within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the side-view type first LED 3114a. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 because the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the first LED and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light. distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, even if the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and the player can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. The pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of the side-view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of the top-view type. ), it is possible to add a part that emits light with high brightness in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b to the part that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission of the second LED 3114b can give a sharpness to the light emission effect, the optimum light emission effect corresponding to the game state can be easily presented, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light is received by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to the desired part to be decorated with the first LED 3114a, the desired part can be decorated with brighter light, and the effect is even greater. The player can be entertained by the luminous decoration with high brightness.

Furthermore, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the accommodation portion 3113d is provided, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a can be changed to the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d. , and the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114, and the main body portion 3113a and the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 are in contact with each other. Since a gap is formed in the back decoration board 3114, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can escape through the gap. It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat. In addition, the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is defined as “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting portion of the first LED 3114a” to “substrate The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a is preferably within the range of ". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114 . If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident on the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the first LED 3114a is reduced, so that the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a fear that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the rear movable decoration 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decoration substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of openings. Since it has the part 3115c, by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c. Also, the heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, and the temperature rise of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed.

A temperature sensor is provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (the rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear decorative body 3110 moves up and down. may be executed with a higher frequency (probability). As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, so that the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of problems due to heat.

Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side with the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since the plate 3113 meanders around the flange portion 3113b, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the rear decoration substrate 3114, and the rear decoration substrate 3114 flows. 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged such that the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit is provided in the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance can be increased, and the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be enhanced, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge can be suppressed.

In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. not As a result, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (moves) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearing position moved downward by driving the back rear driving motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the slider 3116 moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction tends to accumulate on the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. FIG. Since the decoration body 3111 and the decoration body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin with low conductivity, even if a lot of static electricity is accumulated, the surfaces of the decoration body 3110 and the decoration base 3115 are It is difficult to discharge the static electricity accumulated in the whole at once. On the other hand, since the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back rear movable decoration 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decoration 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111. However, as described above, the metal decoration 3111d Since the creeping distance EL to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the rear movable decorative body is provided. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that entertains both the 3110 with a luminous performance decorated with luminescence.

When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is greater than or equal to a predetermined area (for example, 100 cm 2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114. FIG.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of back movable decorative body]
Next, referring mainly to FIG. 157, a back movable decoration 3160, a back movable decoration 3170, a back movable decoration 3180, etc., which are different from the back movable decoration 3110 described above, are described. I will explain in detail. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the movable back decoration of the second embodiment different from the movable back decoration of FIG. 142, and (b) is a movable back of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration in a cross section, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back rear movable decoration of 4th Embodiment in a cross section.

The back rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(a). A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally emitting light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate. 3163 is equipped with a back decoration substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decoration body 3161 of the back rear movable decoration body 3160 includes a transparent plate-shaped body part 3161a, a flange part 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body part 3161a, and a metal body provided on the front surface of the body part 3161a. and a decorative portion 3161c. The body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be decorated with an uneven relief. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decoration sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed. This decorative sheet 3162 has a portion with low transparency in the decoration located in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161 b of the decorative body 3161 .

The light guide radiating plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the rear surface. and a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a quadrangular shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to forwardly reflect the light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a, and are arranged in a fan shape of concentric circles centered on the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164. The side-view type LEDs 3164a are inserted into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, the rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3164 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface (both sides) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3164 .

In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. are in contact with each other, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 . As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3164 . As a result, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear rear decorative substrate 3164 are covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces thereof from the outside. and make it look good.

Since the back rear movable decoration 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decoration body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3164, the metal decoration portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to (copper foil of) the back decoration substrate 3164 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration substrate 3164, and the back decoration is achieved. Damage to the substrate 3164 can be prevented.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. In the rear movable decorative body 3160, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3164 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b), the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame and a light guide radiation plate 3173 which is provided behind the interior decoration 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside. and a rear decorative substrate 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface for irradiating the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in the direction along the front surface.

The outer decoration body 3171 of the back rear movable decoration body 3170 includes a main body part 3171a extending forward and backward in a frame shape, a supporting part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 3171a in a flat plate shape, and the main body part 3171a. and a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the . The distance from the front end of the body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

Although illustration is omitted, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with an uneven relief-like decoration. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171 .

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner decoration 3172 . The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the external decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LEDs 3174a of the rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery thereof is formed in a square along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc around the predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a, and is provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect forward the light from the respective determined LED housing portions 3173a. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b may be configured to reflect light forward from an unspecified direction in the same manner as the reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173 . A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174. The LEDs 3174a are inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG. Although illustration is omitted, the back decoration board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the back decoration board 3174 at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3174 . In addition, the rear back decoration substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the rear rear movable decoration 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decoration 3172 is fitted in the frame of the outer decoration 3171 from the front. , and the vicinity of the outer circumference of the rear surface of the inner decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In addition, in the back rear movable decoration body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a back rear decoration substrate 3174 are inserted from behind into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is attached to the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer circumference of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173. As shown in FIG.

A main body portion 3171 a of the external decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3174 . In this back rear movable decoration 3160, the outer circumferences of the inner decoration 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decoration substrate 3174 are covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. is made invisible to make it look better.

The back rear movable decoration 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back rear decoration substrate 3174 with the main body portion 3171a extending rearward of the outer decoration 3171. The creeping distance EL to (copper foil of) the rear decorative substrate 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the rear decorative substrate 3174, and the rear decorative substrate 3174 is discharged. can be prevented from being damaged.

Thus, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above-described rear-back movable decorative body 3110 . A metal decoration may be provided on the front surface of the inner decoration 3172 as well. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Next, as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c), the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside), and a back decoration substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a mounted on the front surface that can irradiate light forward. and have.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the back rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a flat plate frame-shaped body part 3181a, a flange part 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the body part 3181a, and the entire surfaces of the body part 3181a and the flange part 3181b. and a covering metal decoration portion 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the external decoration body 3181. As shown in FIG. The metal decoration portion 3181c may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is made of a transparent member. The inner decoration body 3182 has a flat plate-like main body part 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body part 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange part 3181b. and a flange portion 3182b extending to the . Although illustration is omitted, the main body portion 3182a has an uneven relief-like decoration formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decoration substrate 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration body 3182 . In other words, the rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 . A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . Although not shown, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3183 within a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3183 . In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the surface (both sides) of the rear-back decorative substrate 3183 .

In the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181 a of the outer decorative body 3181 , and the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decorative body 3182 contacts the outer decorative body 3181 . It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181 b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182 b of the inner decoration 3182 . In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 prevents the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the rear decorative substrate 3183 from being seen from the outside.

In this back rear movable decoration 3180, the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is provided inside the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 on which the metal decoration 3181c is provided. Since the outer circumference of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange part 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the metal decoration part 3181c is separated from the back decoration board 3183 (the copper The creeping distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c can be prevented from flowing to the back decoration substrate 3183 and damaging the back decoration substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the rear-back movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the rear-back movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the front surface of the body portion 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182 may also be provided with a metal decoration portion. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. Figure 158(a) is a perspective view of the bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a bottom left effect unit and the right bottom effect unit in the back unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom-left effect unit and the right-bottom effect unit viewed from the front, and Figure 160 is the bottom-left effect unit and right-bottom effect unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back bottom left effect unit and the back bottom right effect unit from the front.

The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back back effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250 are located on both left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5. They are visible through the transparent game panel 1100, front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 is provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and a translucent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having an axial shaft 3201a protruding rearward. , a lower back left decoration board 3203 provided behind the lower back left decoration body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower left decoration board 3203. A unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided with a back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 rotatably attached and a back bottom left decorative body 3202 attached. , is equipped with

In addition, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 is attached to the back bottom left driving motor 3205 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotating shaft of the back bottom left driving motor 3205. a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3206, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 meshing with the driving gear 3206 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the first transmission gear 3207 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204. The second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotary ornament 3201. and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 on the lower side than the back lower left decorative body 3202 .

The back-bottom-left-rotation decoration 3201 is formed in a shape that imitates a cherry blossom. A shaft 3201a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotary decoration 3201 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower back left decoration 3202, the lower back left decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back bottom left decorative body 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom left rotating decorative body 3201 in the front and back direction, and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-bottom-left decorative board 3203 are full-color LEDs. The back bottom left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back bottom left detection sensor 3203a for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back bottom left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 . When the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotating decoration 3201 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, the back bottom left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment rotates the back side through the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotary decoration 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back-bottom-left effect unit 3200 can cause the bottom-left rotary decoration 3201 and the back-bottom left decoration 3202 to emit light by causing the plurality of LEDs of the bottom-left decoration board 3203 to emit light.

Next, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 will be described. The back bottom right effect unit 3250 is provided behind the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 having translucency having an axial shaft 3251a protruding rearward. , a lower back right decoration board 3253 provided behind the lower back right decoration body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower right decoration board 3253. A unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100, and a back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and a back bottom right decorative body 3252 is attached. , is equipped with

In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 is attached to the back bottom right drive motor 3255 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. a spur gear-shaped driving gear 3256, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 meshing with the driving gear 3256 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the first transmission gear 3257 meshing. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and the second transmission gear 3258 are meshed and attached to the rear end of the axial shaft 3251a of the back lower right rotation ornament 3251. and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 on the lower side than the back lower right decorative body 3252 .

The lower back right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. A shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower right rotary decoration 3251 is formed to have a length that penetrates the lower right lower back decoration 3252, the lower right decoration substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 in the front-to-rear direction and rotating such that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-bottom-right decorative board 3253 are full-color LEDs. The back bottom right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back bottom right detection sensor 3253a for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back bottom right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259 a that protrudes forward and is detected by a back bottom right detection sensor 3253 a of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 . When the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right driving motor 3255, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment rotates the back side through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotary ornament 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 can cause the back bottom right rotating decoration 3251 and the back bottom right decoration 3252 to emit light by causing a plurality of LEDs of the back bottom right decoration board 3253 to emit light.

[5-9f. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a front perspective view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a back-bottom view of the back-bottom middle effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting mechanism for the back-lower middle effect unit and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower-back middle decoration unit of the lower-back middle effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing the lifting and lowering of the lower back decoration body unit by the lower back middle elevating mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration of the back-lower middle decoration unit in the back-lower middle effect unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decoration. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a table showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor; FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the lower back middle decorative body unit in the lower back middle effect unit.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 . The back bottom middle effect unit 3300 is attached behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 . The back-lower middle effect unit 3300 includes a back-lower middle-hanging decoration unit 3320 having a back-lower middle-rotating decoration 3310 rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-lower middle-lifting mechanism for raising and lowering the back-lower middle decoration unit 3320. 3350 and.

The lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower-back middle effect unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 has six number decorations "1" to "6" formed in a relief shape on the entire surface. placed on the circumference. This back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 has translucency. The rear lower middle rotary decoration 3310 has a concave portion 3311 that can accommodate a diffuser lens 3321, a lower rear middle first decoration substrate 3322, and the front end side of a substrate fixing member 3323 in the lower rear middle decoration unit 3320, which will be described later. have.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 includes a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the back lower center rotary decoration 3310, and a diffusion lens 3321 provided behind the diffusion lens 3321. A rear lower middle decoration substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface and a diffusion lens 3321 are attached so as to sandwich the rear lower middle first decoration substrate 3322 from the rear side, and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape. and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is relatively rotatably inserted. a base 3324;

In addition, the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-circular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 protruding from the rotating base 3324 and a spur-shaped rotating gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 are provided.

Further, the back and middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. a back lower middle decorative body 3328, a back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 provided behind the back lower middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that can detect the area detection piece 3325 and a position specifying sensor 3330 that can detect the position detection piece 3326. A sensor 3331 is provided.

In addition, the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the back bottom middle second decoration board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft part 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3332; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with a rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a back-lower-center lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and a lifting slider 3336 slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360 .

The diffusing lens 3321, the first decoration board 3322 in the back, and the board fixing member 3323 are positioned between the bottom-center rotating decoration body 3310 and the rotation base 3324 in the assembled state. It is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the rotary decoration 3310 and is not in contact with either the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 or the rotary base 3324 . By appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322, the numerical decoration (relief) portion of the rotary decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light. The LEDs of the back, middle, and middle first decorative substrate 3322 are full-color LEDs. In addition, the LEDs of the second decorative substrate 3329 on the lower back side are full-color LEDs.

The area detection piece 3325 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 with a diameter larger than that of the rotation gear 3327 . As shown in FIG. 168(a), the area detection piece 3325 has numbers "3", "4", and "5" from between the number decorations "2" and "3" on the back bottom center rotary decoration 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the axis of rotation through the numeral decorations to between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection pieces 3325 . Each position detection piece 3326 is provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each is positioned at the center of the number decoration of the back and middle rotary decoration 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape with a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis. A space of 2×β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is provided between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to line up at an angular interval of θ degrees (60 degrees) centering on the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 . The three area identification sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order of a first area identification sensor 3330a, a second area identification sensor 3330b, and a third area identification sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the values of "3", "4", and "5" in a state in which the decoration "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from the lower portion of the rear surface. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back, bottom, and middle elevating mechanism 3350 . The back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

This back-lower middle decoration body unit 3320 rotates the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327 by rotating the driving gear 3334 by the back-lower middle rotation driving motor 3333. can be done. In addition, the lower back center decoration unit 3320 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first lower back center decoration substrate 3322 and the second lower back center decoration substrate 3329, respectively, so that the lower back center rotating decoration 3310 And the underside inner decoration 3328 can be decorated with light.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the back-bottom middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends thereof are attached to the back-bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back-bottom right effect unit 3250. A unit base 3351 and a unit base 3351 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward; A gear-shaped drive gear 3353 , a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 , and meshes with the first transmission gear 3354 . A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a and an elevation cam gear 3356 which has a drive pin 3356b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity thereof and which is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at the upper center in the left-right direction.

In addition, the base end extending in the left-right direction is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. a second slit 3357b extending in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and into which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof; and a rear lower middle relay board 3358 attached to the front surface.

Further, the rear-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having an elevating slit 3359a extending vertically through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decoration unit 3320 is inserted; A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the driving gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end of the lifting arm 3357 moving upward (frontward). and a spring 3362 biasing the lift arm 3357 to pivot in a clockwise direction with respect to view.

The rear bottom center elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356 . The elevating arm 3357 extends leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356 at its distal end.

The back-lower middle relay board 3358 includes the back-lower middle first decoration board 3322, the back-lower middle second decoration board 3329, the area specifying sensor 3330, the position specifying sensor 3331, the back-lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back-lower middle elevation drive motor. 3352 , the connection between the rear lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the production drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower inner decoration body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359 . The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction of the front cover 3359 . With the elevating slits 3359a and the slide rails 3360, the underside inner decoration body unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide straight up and down.

When the driving gear 3353 is rotated by the driving motor 3352, the lifting cam gear 3350 moves through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back center decoration body unit 3320 can be lifted and lowered together with the back lower center rotary decoration body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, a detailed description will be given of the movement of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 in the lower back middle effect unit 3300 . In a normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 in the back-bottom-middle lifting mechanism 3350 is positioned lower than the base-end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves the back-bottom-middle lifting mechanism of the back-bottom-middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 is positioned below its center of revolution, and is positioned near the proximal end of the first slit 3357a of the elevation arm 3357. . More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if an urging force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b in contact with the first slit 3357a. , the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through, so the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, so that the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the rear bottom/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 tries to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b causes the lifting cam gear 3356 to rotate counterclockwise. try to rotate. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 has the uppermost number decoration among the plurality of number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 placed inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. 111, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the lowermost numeric decoration is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the lower back center first decoration substrate 3322 and the back lower center third decoration are located behind the first starting port 2002. By making the LED of the second decoration substrate 3329 emit light, in addition to the light emission decoration of the back, bottom, and middle rotary decorations, the first start port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be light emission decoration (see FIG. 120, etc.). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the back, bottom, middle, and elevation drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are rotated. As a result, the elevation cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the lifting arm The distal end of 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end of the 3357 moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. As a result, the lower back inner decoration body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end side. At this time, since the lifting arm 3357 is biased clockwise by the spring 3362, the biasing force assists the upward movement of the underside decoration unit 3320. The load applied to the up-and-down drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the first slit 3357a on the base end side, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back-bottom middle-lift drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time, the drive gear 3353 stops rotating. The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the uppermost position.

When the underside decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the elevating arm 3357 counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the line of force of that force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevation cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevation cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevation arm 3357 does not rotate, and the underside decoration body unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The self-weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower/middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, in the state in which the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevation cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end portion of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320, the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the driving pin 3356b causes the elevating cam gear 3356 to move clockwise. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the driving pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the proximal end of the lifting arm 3357, but the driving pin 3356b is in contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. , the driving pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the underside decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the lower back middle rotary decoration body 3310 is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided in the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (the player All the numeral decorations can be seen well from the side) (see Fig. 201).

In order to return the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 is rotated. rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the rear-lower-middle elevation detection sensor 3358a of the rear-lower-middle relay board 3358, the rear-lower-middle elevation driving motor 3352 stops the rotation of the driving gear 3353. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the normal state of the lowered position (furthermore, the center position that prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from rebounding from the outside of the center frame (surrounding wall part 2501) to the inside) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1).

The back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 of this embodiment rotates the back-bottom middle-rotational driving motor 3333 in the back-bottom middle-decorative body unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 , thereby rotating the back-bottom middle-rotation decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327 . can be rotated about a longitudinal axis. By rotating the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The back-bottom middle rotary decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back-bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333 in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position of the back-bottom middle decoration body unit 3320 .

In the normal state, one of the plurality of (here, six) number decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is positioned directly above the center of rotation (stop position). is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), in a state where the numeral decoration “1” on the back-bottom-middle rotary decoration 3310 is positioned upward, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is used to identify the first area. Three area-specific sensors 3330, a sensor 3330a, a second area-specific sensor 3330b, and a third area-specific sensor 3330c, are used for detection. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the numeral decoration “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration of "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is not detected, the numeral decoration "2" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the number decoration "3" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are non-detecting, the numeral decoration of "4" is displayed within a range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located inside.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are non-detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of "5" is displayed in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" is in the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. located within the range.

In this way, any combination of the detection and non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330, ie, the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, determines which number decoration indicates the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether it is positioned within the stop area including.

Since the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back-bottom middle rotation driving motor 3333 is rotated by 30 degrees. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired number decoration on the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the stop position region by the three region specifying sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection strips 3326 are provided. This suppresses the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 and reduces the load.

More specifically, when it is desired to stop the desired number decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 at the stop position, the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the desired stop position. If the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotational direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired digit is 30 degrees of rotation away from the stop position.

In this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 is further rotated by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 is separated from the position specifying sensor 3331. Then, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detection. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is taken as the origin. Then, after rotating β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the lower back middle rotary ornament 3310 by the lower back middle rotation driving motor 3333 is stopped, thereby obtaining the desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the stop of rotation of the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is explained by the angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotary drive motor 3333 which is a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, in a state in which the combination of the three area specifying sensors 3330 satisfies the desired stop position, the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates 13 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is Moving away from the location sensor 3331, the location sensor 3331 becomes non-sensing. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detected is used as the origin, and when it rotates 20 steps, the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decoration body 3310 by the back-lower middle-rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, thereby stopping the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly in place.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the back-lower middle production unit 3300 is a back-lower-middle primary decoration unit 3320 mounted with a plurality of LEDs for luminous decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorations 3310 . It has a decoration substrate 3322 and a second decoration substrate 3329 in the lower back. A plurality of LEDs of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the back side are located behind the six number decorations in the rotary decoration in the back side 3310, and each number decoration can be illuminated independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back center second decoration substrate 3329 are positioned behind the portion outside the plurality of number decorations in the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and are located outside the back lower center rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-lower middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330. Therefore, based on the detection of the area specifying sensors 3330 By properly illuminating a plurality of LEDs on the back and inside first decoration substrate 3322, only specific numeral decorations are illuminated, or each numeral decoration is illuminated in a different color, and rotated. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back center decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is located behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, By illuminating the corresponding portion of the LED on the back and middle first decoration substrate 3322, the first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 . In addition, when the game ball B has won the first start port 2002, the LED of the first decoration board 3322 in the back and bottom is emitted (or one emission mode is determined from among a plurality of emission modes to emit light. ).

As described above, according to the lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect an area having a length covering three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and three area identification sensors 3330 for detecting the area detection pieces 3325 and one position identification sensor for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensors 3331 and 3331 are provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates, the three area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 sequentially increase from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. By repeating this process, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detection once, and the area detection pieces 3325 are detected even until the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. By combining the area specifying sensors 3330 that are connected to each other, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 .

Since the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area-specifying sensors 3330 causes the back-lower middle rotation. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be corrected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions as few as possible.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed, and the back By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front surface, the rotation of the roulette is stopped at an arbitrary stop position after rotating in circles. Since it is possible to show such an effect to the player, it is possible to excite the player depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position , and the number of stop positions of the back and middle rotary decorations 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasp of stop positions) of the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back-bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the back and middle rotary decorative body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. It is possible to further increase the positioning accuracy of the stop position.

In the above-described embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together with) the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. Without limitation, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member such as the drive gear 3334 that rotates with the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 .

[5-9g. Backstage production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a front perspective view of an upper back effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper back effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. be. Fig. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the upper back elevating decorative body unit in the upper back effect unit and is seen from the front. It is a diagram.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing from the front the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotary decoration in the back-up production unit. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing the lifting mechanism of the upper lifting decorative body unit in the upper rear effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising/lowering mechanism of a raising/lowering decoration body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back upper back rotary decoration body from a front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory view showing the decoration substrate from the front in a state in which the rear up/down lifting decorative body unit is moved to the appearing position in the back up production unit.

The back up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back back effect unit 3100 . As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back top effect unit 3400 includes a back top front rotary ornament 3410 having an axis shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the back surface, and a back top front rotary decoration 3410. A rear upper front decoration body 3421 extending in the left and right direction through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and a rear upper front decoration body 3421 provided behind the rear upper front decoration body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A front decoration board 3422 and a back top front decoration body 3421 are provided behind the back top front decoration board 3422, and a back top front decoration body 3421 is attached to the front side to rotatably support the shaft 3410a of the back top front rotary decoration body 3410. and a unit base 3423 that

In addition, the rear effect unit 3400 is mounted between a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space with the rear surface of the unit base 3423, and a unit base 3423 having a rotation axis in front of the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. A rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425 attached so as to protrude into the space of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 attached to the rotation shaft of the rear upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and meshing with the drive gear 3426 A rotating gear 3427 having a spur gear-like shape and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and having a detecting piece 3427a projecting forward, and a back upper front decoration substrate 3422. and a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 attached to the rear surface of the rotary gear 3427 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the rear side effect unit 3400 includes a rear side lifting drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a rear side lifting drive motor 3429. A spur-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of a motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a penetrates the rear cover 3424. an elevation cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to a rear cover 3424, having a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from near the outer circumference of the gear portion 3431a; , a rear upper elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the rear upper front decoration substrate 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431, and a elevation cam gear 3431 at the tip side where the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is provided. A back up elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the front-back direction so that it moves up and down by the revolution of the driving pin 3431b of the back up elevating decoration unit 3450 A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 to urge the 3450 so that the front end side of the 3450 rotates upward, and the upward movement of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is restricted. and a bar-shaped restricting member 3434 that is engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the upper rear lifting decoration unit 3450 is a rear upper rear decoration in which an axial shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the rear upper rear rotary decoration 3440 penetrates at the center. A body 3451, a rear upper decoration board 3452 provided behind the upper rear decoration body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear upper rear decoration body 3451 from behind the upper rear decoration board 3452. is attached to the front surface, and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3423 to rotatably support the shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary ornament 3440.

In addition, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the rotation shaft of the back upper rear rotation driving motor 3454. A spur gear-shaped driving gear 3455 attached to the driving gear 3455, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshing with the driving gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456 A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the lifting unit base 3453 and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3457 and a spur-like rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Furthermore, the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3453 so as to cover the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back top effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. An axial shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 penetrates the back upper front decoration 3421, the back upper front decoration substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and extends through the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 . The back upper front decoration 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decoration 3410 placed in the center in the horizontal direction, and the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it is rotated so that it is positioned in the The entire back upper front decoration 3421 has translucency.

The back top front decoration substrate 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decoration body 3421 in the left-right direction. By illuminating the LED of the back top front decorative substrate 3422, the back top rotary decoration 3410 and the back top front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper front decoration board 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 and the upper back elevation detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the upper back decoration board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration 3410, and has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface, and an arcuate shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is inserted. and an elongated slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. As shown in FIG.

A detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 is detected by a rear upper rotation detection sensor 3428 which penetrates through a through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevation cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b protruding rearward is provided at a portion that protrudes outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The driving pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear upper elevation decorative body unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates through the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. A shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the upper back rotary decoration 3440 penetrates the upper back decoration 3451, the upper back decoration substrate 3452, and the elevation unit base 3453, and extends through the elevation unit base 3453. extends to the rear of the The back top rear decoration 3451 stacks two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 in front and behind, and rotates so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been made. The rear upper back decoration body 3451 has translucency as a whole.

The back top decoration board 3452 can make the top back rotary decorations 3440 and the back top decorations 3451 emit light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs of the back top decoration board 3452 are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so that the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is relatively rotatable. and an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. In the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted. The motor cover 3460 has a cherry blossom-like decoration on the front surface.

Next, the movement of the back top front rotary decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, and the back top lifting decoration unit 3450 in the back top effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state of the back side effect unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotary gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back side front rotary decoration 3410 is detected by the back side rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state in which one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 having the back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side extends in the left-right direction, and the whole except the tip side is It is positioned behind the back upper front decoration 3421 and is in a retracted position that is invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back upper elevating decoration unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in the state assembled to the game board 5, Not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431 c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432 . In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevation unit base 3453 of the rear elevation decoration unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431 b of the elevation cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453 b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force acts to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the force is not applied. Since the line of force passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve either, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back upper elevation decoration body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. no. Therefore, the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the driving pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear elevation driving motor 3429, the elevation cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. As a result, the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the driving pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the driving pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. The vertical lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft hole 3453a by the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450 so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b It slides in the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further clockwise and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the motor gear 3430 is stopped from rotating by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, and the drive pin 3431b is rotated. stops revolving.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 is stopped, and the front end side of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back upper rear rotary decoration 3440 is moved. , the state of the appearance position moved downward from the back upper front decoration body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side of the upper back up/down decoration unit 3450 is positioned lower than the front upper back decoration 3421, so that the upper back rotation decoration 3440 and the like are visible from the front. becomes possible.

In the state in which the back-upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is at the appearing position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 . As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevation cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevation cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevation unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 rotates counterclockwise so that the tip side moves downward from the appearance position. , and the weight of the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back upper elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431 .

In addition, when the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearing position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 tries to rotate further counterclockwise due to the weight of the rear lifting decorative body unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 rotates clockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Attempt to rotate in the direction of rotation. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevation unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b abuts on the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the driving pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, so that the counterclockwise rotation of the back upper lifting decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

In a state in which the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440 provided on the tip side becomes visible from the front. In the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear upper rear rotation decoration is rotated via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. Body 3440 can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back top rear rotary decoration 3440 is visible from the front, by rotating the driving gear 3455 by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454, the rotating back top rear rotary decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When the back upper elevating decorative body unit 3450 is returned from the appearance position to the retracted position, the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the opposite direction by the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, so that the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 moves up and down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the front end side of the back lifting decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the rear elevation detection sensor 3432, by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the rear elevation drive motor 3429, the rear elevation decoration unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the upper elevating back decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and elevating the upper back decorative body. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back side effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back side front decoration substrate 3422 behind the back side front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back side front decoration body 3421. By properly emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper front decoration 3421 can be decorated with light. In addition, since the back top decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back top back rotary decoration body 3440 and the back top back decoration body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top back decoration board 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, it is possible to light-embellish the back top rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top rear decorative body 3451 .

At this time, in a state in which the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position side, the LED of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 is caused to emit light, so that the back upper rear rotation decoration which is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back top decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Next, the back-left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the back left effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 178(b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back It is a diagram. Figure 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back left decoration unit of the back left effect unit and viewed from the front. Figure 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back left decoration unit of the back left effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-left decoration unit in the back-left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 . The back-left direction effect unit 3500 includes a back-left rotating decorative body 3510 having translucency that can rotate about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. A rear left decoration unit 3520 and a rear left rear drive unit 3550 mounted in the rear box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear left decoration unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

The back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear left rotation decoration 3510 has a columnar shaft 3510a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 includes a back rear left decoration 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decoration 3510 penetrates at the center, and a back rear left decoration. A rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear left decorative board 3522 attached to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 from the rear of the rear left decorative board 3522. , a front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotary ornament 3510, and is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3523, and its upper end side is rotatable to the back rear left drive unit 3550. and a movable base 3524 to which it is attached.

In addition, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a rear rear left rotation driving motor 3525 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a rear rear left rotary drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a left rotation drive motor 3525 and a spur gear 3526 engaged with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of an axial shaft 3510a of a back rear left rotation decoration 3510 A gear-shaped rotary gear 3527 is provided.

The rear left decorative body 3521 of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency. The side petals are formed in a rotated shape so that they lie between the front petals. The plurality of LEDs on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left decorative body 3521 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3523 . The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape away from the shaft hole 3524a. A support shaft 3551a of a reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the left back back decoration body unit 3520 rotates the left back back decoration body 3510 through the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the back left driving unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a for rotatably supporting the back left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of a reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 mounted so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear mounted on the rotation shaft of the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 3555 and .

In addition, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with a motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to a unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , a drive pin 3557b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c projecting forward from near the front periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending horizontally into which a driving pin 3557b of 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of a movable base 3524 in the back rear left decoration unit 3520 extending horizontally below the first slit 3558a. has a second slit 3558b into which is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 attached between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553 so as to be vertically slidable.

Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that biases the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. 3553, a rear rear left relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the rear rear left relay board 3561; It has

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is a vertically extending metal plate, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward from the top. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration body unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is positioned near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 with the drive pin 3557b passing through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 . The detection piece 3557c is detected by a back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near its upper end and a second slit 3558b near its lower end. The spring 3559 has its lower end attached to the link member 3558 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3560 .

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is inserted. The rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the rear left decoration board 3522, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the rear-left effect unit 3500 will be described. 183 and 184(a), the back-left effect unit 3500 normally has a back-left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side (front end side). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the rear front left effect unit 3700, and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left effect unit 3700, and the back-left elevating drive motor. Only part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the part facing the front of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 is covered with the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, so that the player can invisible from the side (see Figure 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557 c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3557 and positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3524b positioned to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is It is positioned near the left end of the link member 3558 in the second slit 3558b.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the driving pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3557 (the revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 never moves upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotary decoration 3510) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the elevation cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the leftward direction. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 rotates the motor gear 3555 counterclockwise, the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. As a result, the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 revolves counterclockwise. When the drive pin 3557b revolves counterclockwise, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3558a, thereby moving the link member 3558 upward. It will happen.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520 protruding below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. , and while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves. It rotates counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 is reduced.

In this way, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, so that the rear left rotary decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves rightward. As a result, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player's side).

In the rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevation cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 184 (c) )). In the state of the second appearing position, the back left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated counterclockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3557b is positioned directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3557 when the back rear left decoration body unit 3520 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 causes a force to rotate the left rear decorative body unit 3520 in the clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 tries to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is positioned right above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, and the like.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearing position, the elevation cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise so that the driving pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b. A force acting from the one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b causes the elevation cam gear 3557 to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the driving pin 3557b tries to revolve to move leftward, but since the driving pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the driving pin 3557b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is blocked, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear left rotation decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this rear left decorative body unit 3520, the driving gear 3526 is rotated by the rear left rotational drive motor 3525, so that the left rear rear rotational decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshing with the driving gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 183). Therefore, when the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player's side), if the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotating drive motor 3525, the rotating back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is rotated by the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557. As the link member 3558 moves downward, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear left decorative body unit 3520. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back-left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back-left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-left left decorative body 3521. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back left decoration substrate 3522 to emit light, the back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is turned from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the LED of the rear left decoration substrate 3522 is caused to emit light, thereby producing light emitting decoration. The back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-left left ornament 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back rear right production unit]
Next, the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185(a) is a front perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit. Fig. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the right rear effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and Fig. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the right rear rear effect unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit and viewed from the front. Figure 189 is an exploded view of the back right decoration unit of the back rear right effect unit. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-right decoration unit in the back-right effect unit.

The back right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back back effect unit 3100 . The back right direction effect unit 3600 includes a back right rotation decorative body 3610 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a back side that rotatably supports the back right rotation decoration body 3610 on the lower end side. A rear right decoration unit 3620 and a rear rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the rear box 3010 for rotating the upper end side of the rear right decoration unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. .

The back-right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape resembling a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back rear right rotation decoration 3610 has a columnar shaft 3610a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a back rear right decoration 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center, and a back rear right decoration. A rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a rear right decorative board 3622 attached to the rear side of the rear right decorative body 3621. , a front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and the front cover 3623 is attached to the rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side is rotatable to the back rear right driving unit 3650. and a movable base 3624 to which it is attached.

In addition, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a rear rear right rotation driving motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that the rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623; A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a right rotation drive motor 3625 and a drive gear 3626 meshing with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration 3610 A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decoration 3621 of the rear rear right decoration unit 3620 has translucency. The side petals are formed in a rotated shape so that they lie between the front petals. A plurality of LEDs on the rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape that combines a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 in a front view and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of the portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623 , and the upper end side thereof extends upward beyond the upper end of the front cover 3623 . The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating in the front-rear direction on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape away from the shaft hole 3624a. A support shaft 3651a of a reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation driving motor 3625, the right rear rear decoration body unit 3620 rotates the right rear rear decoration body 3610 through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated around an axis of orientation.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a for rotatably supporting the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and attached in the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover. A back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached to the upper front surface of the 3653 so that the rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rotation shaft of the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is attached. and a motor gear 3655 having a spur gear shape.

In addition, the rear rear right drive unit 3650 includes a gear portion 3657a in the shape of a spur gear meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. A lift cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the lift cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b that extends left and right below 3658a and into which the operation pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is slidably inserted. and a link member 3658 attached so as to be vertically slidable between.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that biases the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevation cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. 3653, a rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear rear right relay board 3661, a rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 mounted to the rear surface of the rear rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657, A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

A reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward from the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the supporting shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically with substantially the same length from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is shaped like a shallow container that opens rearward.

The elevation cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660 . The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near its upper end and a second slit 3658b near its lower end. The spring 3659 has its lower end attached to the link member 3658 and its upper end attached to the partition plate 3660 .

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is inserted. The rear-right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the rear-right decoration board 3622, the rear-right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear-right elevation drive motor 3654, the rear-right elevation detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for

Next, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. 190 and 191(a), the back-right effect unit 3600 has a back-right rotating decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side (front end side) in a normal state. The unit 3620 is in a retracted position in which it hangs down. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is positioned behind the back front right effect unit 3800 and is invisible from the front (player side). It's becoming

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the right front decorative body 3040 and the right rear effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). is not visible from

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657 c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 . Also, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is positioned directly below the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3657 and positioned near the right end of the link member 3658 in the first slit 3658a. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is positioned at the lower movement end, and the operating pin 3624b positioned to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is It is located near the right end of the link member 3658 in the second slit 3658b.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged by the spring 3659 in the upward direction. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear rear right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position about the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the driving pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right. cannot revolve, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevation cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the elevation cam gear 3657 rotates clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides leftward in the first slit 3658a while pressing upward the inner surface of the first slit 3658a, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. As the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

In this way, the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the rear right rotary decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves leftward. As it moves upward, the back-rear right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevation cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In the state of the first appearing position, the back right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 44 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

When the elevation cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the state of the second appearing position (Fig. 191(c)). ). In the state of the second appearing position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated clockwise by about 74 degrees from the state of the retracted position.

The drive pin 3657b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3657 when the rear right decoration body unit 3620 is in the second appearing position. In this state, the weight of the right back decoration unit 3620 causes a force to rotate the right back decoration unit 3620 about the support shaft 3651a in the counterclockwise direction. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned just above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevation cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the second appearing position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right elevation driving motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In addition, when the back rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevation cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. A force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b causes the elevation cam gear 3657 to rotate clockwise. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. Without this, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is blocked, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be unrotatably locked in the state of the second appearing position.

In a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). becomes visible from

In this back right decoration body unit 3620, the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, so that the back right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 meshing with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (player's side), when the driving gear 3626 is rotated by the right rear rotating driving motor 3625, the rotating right rear rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is rotated by the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction of , the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 moves. It rotates in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear rear right elevation detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 is stopped, thereby retracting the rear rear right decorative body unit 3620. It can be returned to the state of position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back-right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with a back-right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back-right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back-right right decorative body 3621. By appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-right decorative substrate 3622 to emit light, the back-right rotating decoration 3610 and the back-right decoration 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, in a state in which the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED of the rear rear right decoration substrate 3622 is caused to emit light. The back-right rotating ornament 3610 and the back-right right ornament 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a front perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded back front left decoration unit in the back front left effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front left effect unit.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 . The back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes three back-front-left decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-left decoration unit 3710A, a second back-front-left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back-front-left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710 .

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the right. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from those of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back-front-left decoration unit 3710 of the back-front-left effect unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front-rear direction and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. A shutter support member 3712 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed within the frame. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is composed of a translucent plate-shaped back front left decoration 3713 and a back front left decoration 3713 . A back front left decorative board 3714 provided at the back and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a back rear left effect unit attached to a front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the back. a rear cover 3715 attached to the front of the 3500;

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, a back front left A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a support plate 3716 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It is provided with a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides vertically as the link member 3719 rotates to open and close the shutter unit 3730 .

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a "pine tree") in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter "convex" to the right. The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731 . The shutter member 3731 includes a plate-like shutter 3732 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3732, and a left shaft portion 3733 protruding from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. and a crankshaft 3734 extending cylindrically in the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711 . The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733 .

The shaft portion 3733 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front left decorative body 3713 has patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 . The back front left decoration 3713 can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 . The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and has a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent rightward on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. there is The support plate 3716 also has a columnar support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719. As shown in FIG.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate about the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3716a. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with the support pin 3716a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front left ornament 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713. It is

In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is positioned above the shaft portion 3733 .

In this normal state, when the back front left driving solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b opposite to the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection portion 3719b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733 . As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front cover 3711 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3730 is opened and closed by the back front left driving solenoid 3717 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed to the back front left decorative body 3713 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3730 is closed. , the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decoration substrate 3714 are caused to emit light, thereby displaying the back front left decorated with light emission. The ornament 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decoration units: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710 can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and can be decorated with light emission, so that by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a front perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded view of one back-front-right decoration unit in the back-front-right effect unit. and is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199(a) is a front view showing the closed state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit, and (b) is a front view showing the open state of the shutter group in the back front right effect unit.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is positioned behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back-front-right effect unit 3800 has three back-front-right decorations in order from the top: a first back-front-right decoration unit 3810A, a second back-front-right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back-front-right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of body unit 3810 .

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is slanted so that the upper end side moves to the left. Also, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is slightly different from those of the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating back and forth, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. A shutter support member 3812 having a shape is arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each member is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

In addition, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear side, and includes a translucent plate-like back front right decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813 . A back front right decorative board 3814 is provided at the rear and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a back front right effect unit is attached to a front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the back. a rear cover 3815 attached to the front of the 3600;

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a support plate 3816 are attached so as to be rotatable around a horizontal axis. It has a rotatable link member 3819 and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides vertically by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830 .

A front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 is formed in a shape (a shape stylized as a “pine tree”) in which the corners are rounded by tilting the letter “convex” to the left. The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812 a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. This boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to its tip.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831 . The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending in the left and right direction, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a right shaft portion 3833 protruding from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extending to the right. and a crankshaft 3834 extending cylindrically in the direction of.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811 . The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833 .

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft portion 3833 in the horizontal direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820. As shown in FIG.

Although illustration is omitted, the back front right decorative body 3813 has patterns such as characters, items, logos, etc. along the concept of the pachinko machine 1 . The back front right decoration 3813 can diffuse the light from the LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 . The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are full color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction, and its front end side is bent leftward. The support plate 3816 has a left bent front end portion attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. there is In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a projecting leftward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819. As shown in FIG.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the axis in the horizontal direction around the support pin 3816a. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection portion 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and has a transmission groove into which each crank shaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is vertically slidably inserted.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832 of the closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player's side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832) has a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813. It is

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the crank shaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is positioned above the shaft portion 3833 .

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connection portion 3819b opposite to the first connection portion 3819a moves downward. The downward movement of the second connection portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection portion 3819b to move downward.

When the opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833 . As a result, since the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces the vertical direction, the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832 . The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by deenergizing (OFF) the back front right driving solenoid 3817, the plunger, which had been moving upward, moves downward due to the biasing force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, the shutter unit 3830 is opened and closed by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 , so that the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decorative body 3813 . The decoration (picture) can be switched to a different decoration (picture), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, since the back front right decoration substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decoration body 3813, the plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 can be illuminated when the shutter unit 3830 is closed. , the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decoration substrate 3814 are caused to emit light, thereby displaying the back front right decorated with light emission. The ornament 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decoration units: a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter units 3830 of the 3810 can be independently opened and closed, and the lighting can be decorated, various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back movable ornament of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body of the back-bottom middle effect unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Fig. 202 shows the back top rear rotating decoration of the back top rear effect unit moving from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back left rotating decorative body of the back rear left effect unit moving from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back back right. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the rear-right-rotating ornaments of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearing position; Fig. 203 shows the rear left rotation decoration of the rear left production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit from the retreat position to the second appearance position, respectively. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state; FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state.

Fig. 205 shows the back rear movable decoration of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back upper rear rotary decoration of the back upper rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, and the back rear left effect unit to the back rear. Move the left-hand rotation decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-right rotation decoration of the back-right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle rotation decoration of the back-lower middle production unit. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board shown in a state of being moved from the lowered position to the raised position;

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state 111, through them, the back front left decoration 3030, the back front right decoration 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back bottom left. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top effect unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be visually recognized well, and the center accessory 2500 Through the frame of , the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well.

Further, in more detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is positioned along the side to the vicinity of the right middle unit 2700 . In addition, the rear rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is positioned behind the upper rear effect unit 3400 and is invisible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general prize opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 . The bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201 and the bottom-right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000 .

In addition, the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is in the state of the lowered position, and is positioned behind the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 so that the upper part projects into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the back-lower-middle-rotating decorative body 3310 obliquely from above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the upper front ornamental body 3421 of the upper rear effect unit 3400 extends laterally in the upper part of the game area 5a in a front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the horizontal direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center accessory. 2500 , and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back upper front rotating decoration 3410 is in the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration 3421, and is in a state in which one petal is directed upward. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the upper back elevating decoration unit 3450 having the upper back rear rotary decoration 3440 of the upper back effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the front upper back decoration 3421. Not visible from the side.

In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotating decoration 3510 of the back-left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side. In addition, the back-right decoration unit 3620 having the back-right rotating decoration 3610 of the back-right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back-front-right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , are invisible from the player side.

In addition, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, The lower part is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a front view. The lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in a front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the normal state of the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter units 3730 are closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative bodies 3713 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, are positioned within the game area 5a in a front view, and are transparent. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. - 特許庁The first back front right decoration unit 3810A on the upper side of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view, The left side is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the bottom side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center panel on the right side from the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in front view. It is positioned behind the role object 2500 and the remaining left side is positioned within the frame of the center role object 2500 .

In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, the shutter units 3830 are closed and the back front right decorations 3813 are invisible. Along with this, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs the rear back production of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back back left effect unit 3500, back back right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700 , and the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect and light emitting effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is released, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the horizontal direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage over the player is generated. It is possible to make the player think that the game is not possible, and to increase the expectation for the game.

Although not shown, in the back rear effect unit 3100, after dropping the back rear movable decorative body 3110 to the appearing position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back rear movable decorative body. 3110 is returned to the retracted position, by appropriately changing the forward/reverse rotation of the back driving motor 3126, the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the direction center. As a result, the rear back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back rear movable decorative body 3110 and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved. The movable decorative body 3110 can be focused on, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back-lower-middle rotary drive motor 3333 rotates the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is favorable from the player's side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates round and round, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained.

Since six number decorations are provided on the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310, by rotating the back-lower-middle-rotation decoration body 3310, the player has the impression that the roulette wheel is spinning. can give Therefore, when rotating the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the performance display device 1600 is caused to display a performance image such as "Sugoroku", and at the same time, the numbers of the number decorations of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating are displayed. The "piece" may advance according to the . As a result, the player can feel nervous depending on whether or not the rotating back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration so that the "piece" advances to the desired "masu". It can make the player's heart beat faster and entertain the player. In addition, the advance of the "pieces" can make the player feel that the expectation value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

As an effect using the back bottom left effect unit 3200, the back bottom right effect unit 3250, the back top effect unit 3400, the back back left effect unit 3500, and the back back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, FIG. As shown, in the bottom-left effect unit 3200, the bottom-left driving motor 3205 rotates the bottom-left rotating decorative body 3201, and in the bottom-right effect unit 3250, the bottom-right rotating decorative body is rotated by the bottom-right driving motor 3255. Rotate the 3251. In addition, in the back upper effect unit 3400, the back upper front rotary drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410, and the back upper lift drive motor 3429 moves the back upper elevating decoration body unit 3450 downward from the retracted position. At the same time when it is rotated to the appearing position, the back top rear rotary decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top rear rotation driving motor 3454 . Further, in the rear left effect unit 3500, the rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right first appearance position by the rear left elevation drive motor 3554, and the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is operated to move the rear rear left decoration body unit 3520 to the first appearance position. Rotate the counterclockwise rotation decoration 3510 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration body unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right rotation decoration 3610 .

As a result, the back top/rear rotation decoration 3440, the back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration. Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top front rotation decoration 3410, the back top rear rotation decoration 3440, the bottom back left rotation decoration 3510, and the bottom back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate, Rotating the six ornaments can give a strong impact to the player, making them feel that something good will happen and increasing their expectations for the game.

At this time, the back upper elevating drive motor 3429, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are appropriately rotated in the forward and reverse directions to rotate the upper back elevating decorative body unit 3450 and the back rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back upper/rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swinging, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Players can be entertained.

Also, at this time, the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate round and round, so that the player can strongly feel that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player has an advantage will occur. It is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

As an effect using the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the rear left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 . In addition, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 moves the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper left, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620 to the second appearance position on the upper left. The rotary decoration 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate at a position approximately at the height of the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player is surprised and something good happens. It is possible to make the player think that this is not the case, and it is possible to heighten expectations for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-left rotating ornament 3510 and the back-right rotating ornament 3610 of the second appearance position are set to the eyes of the predetermined character's face in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to display an effect image that will be the position. As a result, it is possible to present the player with an effect in which the character's eyes are spinning, and the player can be entertained.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The closed state is changed to the open state, and the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right driving solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800 . As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, since each has three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810, , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the player, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, a back-back effect unit 3100, a back-bottom left effect unit 3200, a back-bottom right effect unit 3250, a back-bottom middle effect unit 3300, a back-up effect unit 3400, a back-left effect unit 3500, and a back-right effect unit 3600. , back front left effect unit 3700, and back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorations may be moved. As a result, all the ornaments are movable, so that the player can be convinced that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) will occur, and the expectation for the advantageous game state can be heightened. can. In this case, in the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600, the back-left decoration unit 3520 and the back-right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decoration has been described. It can be shown, and the player's interest can be further attracted.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately combine the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., making it difficult for the player to get bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above configuration will be described. The game board 5 of this embodiment has an opening 1112 penetrating the game panel 1100 having the game area 5a on the front side. A frame-shaped peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossibility non-circulation area and formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening part 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is likely that the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 will be the circulation area and the inner side will be the non-circulation area. A flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from a position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 in which the front surface of the game panel 1100 is the same in the longitudinal direction toward the non-distribution area side (inner side). At the same time, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided with a flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside). Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Thus, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position where it touches the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is enlarged, the substantial distribution area will not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, by enlarging the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the substantial reduction of the circulation area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a, the non-circulation area The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind the region, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be made more visible, and the game ball B can be played in the circulation region and the non-circulation region. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-distribution area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion is formed by the flange portion 2502 provided in a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. In addition to being able to reinforce the portion 2501 from the distribution area side (outside), by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. , Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching it to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, and the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B, which circulates in the game area 5a, from making a strange movement different from the conventional one by contacting the peripheral wall part 2501, which gives the player an unpleasant feeling. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center The performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided behind and the movable body and decoration of the performance unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), so the non-distribution area. It is possible to enlarge the range in which the production images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. provided behind the can be seen, making it easier to demonstrate the production effect of the production device, and providing behind the non-distribution area The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by making the performance image of the performance display device 1600, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. visible, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the transparent part can be used to light the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit the light from the light-emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make it look lively, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, the movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be provided with The above effect can be obtained by the light emitted by the light emitting means (LED), and the transparent support portion 2503 enables the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 extends in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the peripheral wall portion 2501 as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the front-rear direction, the support portion 2503 can be attached to the game panel. Compared to when it is extended with the same thickness as 1100, the lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can be attached to the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the production device (production display device 1600 etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and the portion behind the support portion 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown by the tip side of , compared to the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, it is difficult to see a single design, and it seems that the details are particular. A pachinko machine 1 with a deep design can be provided.

In addition, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at that portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extending amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 extends from the peripheral wall part 2501 in the front and back directions of the game panel 1100 at the same position, the support part 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to give an illusion as if it is, and it is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the support part 2503 .

In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front and rear direction. Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the tip side of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium abuts against it.

Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side can be inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501 .

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be seen when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. The pachinko machine appears to protrude forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, can give a sense of unity between the peripheral wall part 2501 (the center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and has a good appearance in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 regardless of whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque. The performance image of the performance display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area where the performance display device 1600 is provided, the movable body of the performance unit, the decorative body, etc. can be favorably visually recognized from the front (player side). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the performance effect of the game, etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it can be seen to protrude outward, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the presence of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the circulation area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

In addition, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution area side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the portion at which the flange portion 2502 is provided Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 interferes with the visibility of the production device (the production display device 1600 and the production unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, it is possible to enlarge the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect device, and to the player. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the performance by.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502 allow the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to be maintained at the same level as that of the conventional product. Deformation of the molded product can be prevented when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support part 2503 extends in a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the central accessory 2500 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, only the part of the support part 2503 is in contact with the other parts. A large difference in shrinkage can be avoided, and deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side are provided. , and are transparent, and behind the back left elevation drive motor 3554 and back rear right elevation drive of the back rear right production unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of it is outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extend from the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts in the game area 5a of the lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear right lifting drive motor 3654. , the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654, The back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation driving motor 3654 can be made difficult to see from the player side through the transparent front component member 1000, the game panel 1100 and the inside of the game area 5a, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 is improved. In addition, instead of the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be seen. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

In addition, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundaries of the game area 5a defined by the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are difficult to understand. A feeling of openness can be given by looking like this, and even if the game area 5a has the same size as that of a conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. Therefore, by making the game area 5a look larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1 can be heightened, and the player can enjoy the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the players.

In addition, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the part in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the front left decorative body 3030 and the right front rear decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above, the functional parts can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the central side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and in a front view, the back front extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decoration can make the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a difficult to understand, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By making it stand out, the appeal to the player can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 It is possible to prevent the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back-left effect unit 3500 and the back-right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front constituent member 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the appearance is good. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by preventing the deterioration of the pachinko machine.

In addition, at least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front (the rear rear left elevation drive motor 3554 completely (entirely) outside the game area 5a), in order to arrange the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654, the front component 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a The rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. It is possible to suppress the space of the game area 5a from becoming smaller by taking balance. In other words, since a part of the back rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component member 1000 and the outer circumference of the game area 5a can be reduced. , the space of the game area 5a can be relatively increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can further exhibit the above-described effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the movable character inside the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space inside the game area 5a can be increased. The range of effects performed in the game area 5a is widened. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1 as if the front structural member 1000 and the game panel 1100 were emitting light. can improve the appearance of Further, although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are respectively attached. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is made of a transparent member, so that the light from the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be emitted from the back front left decoration 3030 or the back It is possible to give an impression that the light reaches the front right decoration 3040 and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevation driving motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be understood that it is a functional component by covering it to some extent without covering the entire part. It can be spicy and made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decoration 3030 does not have a size so as to cover the entire back rear left elevation drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effects as described above. While reducing the cost of 3030, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger. At least a part of the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevation drive motor 3654 is covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, it extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a for a predetermined point where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (such as the lower left point in FIG. 131, that is, the lower left corner point on the game board 5). By providing the decoration, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger.

In addition, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is positioned in front of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 are provided behind the game area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decoration 3030 and the back front right decoration 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game can be smoothly played in the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a front view, the back front left decorative body The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the like can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the rear front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that the inside portion of the door window 101a in the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the rear front left decorative body 3030 is used to move the rear rear left lifting and lowering. Since the uncovered portion can be covered with the frame-shaped door frame 3 without covering the entire drive motor 3554, the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being longer than necessary, The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 in the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since the seal is attached, the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), and the first starting opening 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 . Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning port 2001, the number of game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting A lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first start opening 2002 can avoid the player's concentration on the general prize winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline of interest by increasing the expectation for the game, and to make the player recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, so that the player can aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy the game.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be nervous, and when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 Depending on whether or not the lottery of the first special lottery result generates an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot"), the player can be excited and excited, and the expectation for the game can be heightened. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. After that, when a winning lottery is drawn according to the result of the first special lottery, an advantageous game state occurs in which the first big prize winning port 2005 and the second big winning prize port 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted by the general prize winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result is not drawn, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. , the player can continue to enjoy the game without being discouraged, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general prize winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the shape (appearance) of the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 is greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, the player does not feel uncomfortable, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player enjoys the game with the pachinko machine 1 and loses interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. As a result, the player can surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002, and can fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the general prize winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are made of a transparent member, the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 can be used. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, or diffuse the light from the means (LED of the decorative substrate), the general prize-winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is improved. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the appeal to the player.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game ball B is placed in the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in the 2001 is guided backward later than the game ball B received in the first special lottery result lottery, the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is guided to the general prize winning opening 2001.例文帳に追加Since it can be guided backward at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the reception of the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 is given to the general winning. The player can enjoy the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately pushed backward ( Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B accepted in the first start opening 2002, it is unnecessary for the game ball B to be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 It is possible to prevent the player from experiencing the game for a long time, direct the player's interest to the next game ball B, and smoothly advance the game to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the general prize winning port 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Then, depending on the player, an illusion can be given as if the game ball B has been received in the general winning hole 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap the general prize winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been received in the general winning opening 2001, and it may be thought that it was an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to avoid the distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side, and the player can avoid it. Therefore, it is possible to keep the game enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of materials applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening can be reduced. A decoration such as a sticker on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost for the general prize winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more amusing to the players by using the reduced cost for the performance device or the like.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 of the back-bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, a rotating back-bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, six) stop positions The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 whose length is half the length of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (here, six) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality (here, four) of sensors consisting of a plurality (here, three) of area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect Since it is provided, when the back-lower-middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area-specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area-detecting pieces 3325 repeatedly increase and then decrease in order from one side in the rotation direction. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detecting piece 3325, the current rotational position of the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back-bottom center rotary decoration 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the area detection pieces 3325 are half and three stop positions are arranged side by side. and the minimum number of area-specific sensors 3330 required to detect movement to any stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set to a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 is positioned at the first stop position. It is assumed that only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325 at (the position of the decoration number "3"). From this state, when the back and middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decoration number "2"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Furthermore, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the back and middle rotation decoration 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decoration number "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor Sensor 3330 c detects area detection piece 3325 . Further, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number "5"), the second area specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the back-bottom middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decoration number "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back-lower middle rotary decoration 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decoration number "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state where the bottom back middle rotary decorative body 3310 rotates, detection/non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated.

In this way, since the area detection pieces 3325 are provided with a length that covers half the number of stop positions, a combination of the detections of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 enables the back and bottom middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detected until the back underside middle rotary decoration 3310 rotates to the next stop position, the back underside can be detected. The current position of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Further, since the back and middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. By minimizing the deviation of the stop position, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back-lower middle rotary ornament 3310 having a plurality of stop positions.

In addition, since the stop position of the back-lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the back-lower middle-rotation decoration body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable (unpleasant feeling), and it is possible to entertain the performance (movable performance) by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress the decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (the back-bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not give discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased, the stop position deviation can be suppressed, and the back By rotating the lower middle rotary decoration 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 is increased compared to the case where the back lower middle rotary decoration 3310 is reciprocated. can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest, and the rotation of the back-bottom middle-rotation decorative body 3310 can be strongly attracted. It is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by rotating the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the back-bottom middle-rotating decorative body 3310 faces forward toward the player side, and after rotating in circles, an arbitrary Since the player can see a roulette-like performance in which rotation is stopped at the stop position of , the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This makes it possible to entertain the movable presentation by the back-lower middle-rotation decorative body 3310 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the back lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position and the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. , and the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a larger number of stop positions can entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

It should be noted that, in the above-described embodiment, as the back-lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 in the back-lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, six stop positions are shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having a plurality of stop positions (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) was shown to rotate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body having a plurality of stop positions. For example, it may be “rotating”, “moving in a straight line”, “moving in an arc”, “moving in a curve”, and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the . The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, a second A second starting hole sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the starting hole 2004, a general prize winning hole sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001, and a first prize winning hole 2005. A first big winning hole sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B, a second big winning hole sensor 2601 for detecting a game ball B received in a second big winning hole 2006, and a game ball B received in an out hole 2010 are detected. out port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub-out port 2012, And detection signals from magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I/O port, respectively.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby controlling the starter solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. 2612, etc., or output a drive signal from the main control I / O port to the function display unit 1400 status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special pending number display device, second special symbol display, second special reserved number display, round display, etc., and output a drive signal.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 3052, the second start sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first grand prize sensor 2402, the second grand prize sensor 2601, and the outlet sensor 3053 While contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used, the general prize winning opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. I am using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 3052, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and Detection of game ball B by gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starter sensor 3052, the second starter sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently. , The detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big winning slot sensor 2402 and the second big winning slot sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning hole sensor 3051 .

Furthermore, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used as the out port sensor 3053. FIG. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012 frequently, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. is used.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. In addition, the main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This blackout warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. A control unit 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball tank 552 and a tank rail during maintenance. 553, a ball guide unit 570, and a ball extraction switch for discharging the game ball B in the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. .

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. The payout control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, the ball cut detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is inputted to the payout control input circuit and inputted to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator. , Output to the error LED indicator via the payout control I / O port, and send a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Also, the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the residual of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a residual display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it outputs to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In addition, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. Due to this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decoration board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid or for outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided in the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board. to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the press detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 that indicates that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and uses the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, and the top side Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control by using it together with WDT.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable object drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side, are output by a plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display commands. 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Effect display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively.

[7. Game content]
Game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 are rotated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N, the game ball The flowing speed of B is suppressed, and various motions are imparted to the game ball B so that the motion can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails N, The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opening in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the center release portion 2513a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 .

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200 , or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the center role 2500 is guided. Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, the plurality of guide passages 2520 and 2520 are discharged above the gate portion 2003 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After coming into contact with the obstructing nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The group of guide passages 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impinging portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and does not hit the impingement portion 1006 (right hitting). When the game ball B is hit with a strength somewhat weaker than the ball B, it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the hitting strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated rather than the first guide passage 2521 . Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 at a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521 .

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal hit", the first attacker unit. The closed second starting port 2004 at 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, the game balls B are discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

A game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of hitting the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of , and is sometimes accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012 . When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 , a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, it is discharged out of the game area 5a without an opportunity to be received in the second big prize-winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004, or the first big prize-winning port 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the side right middle unit 2700 has a general winning port 2001, a second big winning port 2006, a second There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting port 2004 or the first big prize winning port 2005, and it is discharged out of the game area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide path group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a hitting operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012.例文帳に追加In this embodiment, in the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide path 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide path 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, it is possible to encourage a hitting operation that requires fine adjustment of the rotation operation of the handle 182 rather than a "right hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the impingement portion 1006, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be encouraged. It is possible to entertain the original game of the pachinko machine 1 mainly having .

A game ball B passing through the left side of the right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and enters the second big winning hole 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. , it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 .

At this time, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second large winning opening 2006 is open, when the game ball B is received in the second large winning opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 from the payout device 580 a predetermined number (for example, 10, or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 .

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006 is the first shelf part 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf part 2412b, the upper left After rolling in the direction, it is released to the left, and further rolls leftward on the third shelf 2412c, the first big winning entrance door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d into the game area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting door 2414, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "ordinary hit", and the second starting door When 2414 is retreating, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous game state (for example, "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability variation (probability variation) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating a "hit" is performed.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the second If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot"), after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. , the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first big winning opening 2005 when the first big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 . Therefore, when the first big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the first big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and the player is encouraged. can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit".Then, the special lottery result that was drawn is Predetermined time (for example, 0.1 ~ 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time) suggested to the player.In addition, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 lottery The special lottery results include "loss", "small hit", "2R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "15R jackpot", "variable (probability change) hit", "time saving (time reduction) hit", " There are "probable short-time hit", "non-probable short-time hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state capable of accepting the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the first big prize winning opening 2005 becomes open for receiving the game ball B, and then a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or the first big prize winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize winning opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is 1 round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is the "second big hit", after the first big winning hole 2005 is able to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Time) is generated. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a "small winning" game, a "big winning" game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back effect unit 3100, Bottom left effect unit 3200, back bottom right effect unit 3250, back bottom middle effect unit 3300, back top effect unit 3400, back rear left effect unit 3500, back rear right effect unit 3600, back front left effect unit 3700, and back front left effect unit 3700 By appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[8. Standing Auxiliary Member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting support member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the table plate 8 of the island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own when it is installed (attached) to the pachinko machine 1 to prevent it from overturning. This self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. Further, the self-supporting support member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 . On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounted portion that is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 . In this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending back and forth as the mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as the mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid forward and backward with respect to the plate unit 200, and the attached portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the plate unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Further, when the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to when it was removed.

The attachment (attachment) between the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, and includes "insertion of projections into holes" and "claw attachment". "By locking", "By magnetic attraction by a magnet", "By hook-and-loop fastener", "By sucker", "By peelable adhesive material", etc. may be used. Further, the position where the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, and may be "inside", "at least one of the left and right side surfaces", "front surface", or the like. .

After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self supporting member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored on the game hall side. It is attached to the unit 200 and used. The self-standing auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the plate unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached during the installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 includes the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which protrude greatly forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 tends to fall down easily, by mounting the self-supporting assisting member 7 on the lower mounting part of the plate unit 200, the self-standing of the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted to prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the space between the plate unit 200 and the table plate 8 of the island equipment can be maintained. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from overturning forward by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 positioned at the top, the pachinko machine 1 is held down so as not to overturn when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 is such that there is no need to install it and the labor required for installation work is easy.

In addition, by attaching the self-standing auxiliary member 7 to the attachment portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

Furthermore, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 is assisted to stand on its own. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko from overturning forward, it is possible to increase the size of the performance device, the decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 and to protrude further forward. It is possible to easily construct a pachinko machine whose appearance is greatly different from that of the machine, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like protrude greatly forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above-described embodiment, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to attach and detach the plate unit 200 from the mounting portion. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached and detached by sliding the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202) provided detachably on the door frame 3 , door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine is installed. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that part of the pachinko machine 1 can be replaced. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 projecting forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 is used as a functional member that also serves as the self-standing auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the plate unit 200, it can function as a self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it can function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be detachably attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and functional members (for example, "substrate cover covering the substrate", "wiring "wiring holding member that holds", "protective cover that protects the back of the effect display device and movable decoration", "storage tank in which the game medium is stored", "guidance member in which the game medium circulates", etc.) and You may make it combine. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. to be able to stand on their own. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4, thereby forming a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can be made to function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to store the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 separately, and it is troublesome to manage the removed self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so that it is not lost. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. In addition, when the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is used also as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, compared with the case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not also used as a functional member, the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to reduce the number of parts required for this, and to suppress an increase in cost.

Furthermore, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated within the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 does not need to be attached to the island equipment and stand on its own, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is accommodated in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, so that the presence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the play and the hindrance of the self-standing assisting member 7 in the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. , the installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. In addition, in this case, compared to the case where the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, there is no need to store the auxiliary self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the auxiliary self-supporting member 7 so as not to lose it. can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounting portion that is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown. Also good.

Also, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is not limited to this. , when installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be protruded downward and brought into contact with the tray plate 8 . As a result, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, it is not necessary to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and keep it separately, and the labor required for management on the game hall side can be reduced.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, and the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present embodiment, The back and rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponds to the decorative substrate of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LEDs of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back-rear effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-rear decoration board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted, Since the decoration body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 which constitute the decoration member are arranged, and the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the front side of the decoration body 3111, the rear decoration substrate 3114 and the metal decoration are arranged. Since the portion of the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are positioned between the portion 3111d and the metal decorative portion 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d dissipates the metal decoration. It is possible to prevent a linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration portion 3111d is discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the inside of the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like. along the front surface of the light guide plate 3113, pass through the outer periphery, bypass the rear end of the flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, and flow to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (toward the rear decorative substrate 3114). However, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be sufficiently secured by the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

At this time, since the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to be smaller than the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 and the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b is formed to be smaller than the predetermined outer periphery. The static electricity detoured inward needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 as much as the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is small, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 is further lengthened. It is possible to suppress discharge to the rear decorative substrate 3114 . Therefore, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the first LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 can be prevented from being discharged (spark). and the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration part 3111d is surely illuminated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear decoration substrate 3114. This allows the player to enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided within the predetermined distance SL from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c, static electricity is generated from the outer peripheral side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the board body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the discharge is not discharged to the back decoration board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 and the second LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 can be prevented from being discharged (spark). Damage to the second LED 3114b can be avoided, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decoration body 3111 when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front. The appearance of the decoration body 3111 can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 are covered with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it is covered with the body base 3115 , it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 . In addition, in the rear decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board main body 3114c, and copper foils 3114d forming circuits are formed on both sides of the board main body 3114c. , a predetermined distance SL from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c, and the front side surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with a decorative body 3111, a decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113). 3113, the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is covered with the cover plate portion 3115a of the decoration base 3115, and furthermore, the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is covered with the back decoration substrate 3114. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decoration base 3115 extends rearward, and the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 extends forward from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decoration base 3115. The route of the creepage distance EL through which static electricity is discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the opposite side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is outside the flange portion 3113b. Proceed to the rear side, turn back inside the flange portion 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b, proceed to the front side between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and the flange portion at the tip (front end) of the flange portion 3115b. 3115b becomes a meandering route that turns back to the inside, and the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and discharge to the rear decoration substrate 3114. It can be suppressed that it will be done. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114, so that the plurality of static electricity mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 can be prevented from being discharged (spark). It is possible to avoid damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like, and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d can be replaced with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114a of the rear decoration substrate 3114. The two LEDs 3114b can surely make the light-emitting decoration, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting performance) of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (back rear movable decoration body 3110), thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest. .

In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film as well. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, the legs 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the projections 3115e of the decoration base 3115 are brought into contact with the portions of the rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided at the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. As a result, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d is prevented from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d through the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 that the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided on the portion of the back decoration board 3114 that the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact with, vibrations in the pachinko machine 1 and movement of the back movable decoration 3110 are avoided. Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decoration base 3115 and the back decoration substrate 3114 due to vibration due to movement, the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to be worn or peeled off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, second LEDs 3114b, electronic components 3114e, etc., and short-circuiting of the circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. It is possible to reliably function the electronic component 3114e, etc., and obtain the same effect as described above.

In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the rear decorative substrate 3114 with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115, static electricity discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration substrate 3114 in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 are caused to emit light, the first LEDs 3114a emit light to the back. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c housing the first LED 3114a in the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light enters the body portion 3113a from the portion where the light is located, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided on the rear surface of the body portion 3113a, and is emitted from the front surface of the body portion 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the light-emitting decoration are provided. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 are flat plate-shaped, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration 3110 can be reduced. Further, from the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the leg portion 3113f is protruded rearward so as to be continuous with the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. Since the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving light from the first LEDs 3114a in the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be widened, more light from the first LEDs 3114a can enter the main body portion 3113a and be emitted forward. By increasing the amount of light emitted, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be decorated with brighter light. In the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e. Compared to the case of irradiating light toward, the distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front part of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where the light is emitted forward becomes longer, and the light from the first LED 3114a becomes longer. Light can be widely diffused and emitted forward. Therefore, the whole decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can be evenly and brightly decorated, and the appearance of the luminescence decoration on the decoration body 3111 and the like is not spoiled, and the production effect of the decoration body 3111 and the like can be fully exhibited. be able to. In this way, since the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to arrange the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in a part that is not arranged in the pachinko machine, and the arrangement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in an unexpected part strongly attracts the player's interest. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be easily selected by a player as a pachinko machine to play and that has a high appeal to the player.

In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light from the first LEDs 3114a Heat can be diffused into the first LED housing portion 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. In addition, since a gap is formed between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the second light can be passed through the gap. Heat from the one LED 3114a can be discharged, and heat accumulation from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back decoration substrate 3114 can reduce the unstable light emission or breakage of the first LEDs 3114a. It is possible to reliably emit light as intended, and the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (back movable decoration body 3110) can be surely illuminated by the first LED 3114a, and the back rear movable decoration body 3110 can emit light. It is possible to make the player enjoy the decoration (light emitting performance) and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, since the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c, the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g is capable of reflecting forward the light from the first LED 3114a. By the portion 3113g, the light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f is emitted from the opposite surface to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a), and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since passing through the leg portion 3113f can be reduced, more light from the first LED 3114a can enter the main body portion 3113a, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for causing a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) to emit light is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. has excellent thermal conductivity, the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d, and the heat can be dissipated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is difficult to accumulate. By doing so, the above-described effects can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, a light reflection auxiliary area 3114f recessed backward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and then the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is provided with , the leg portion 3113f forming part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113. Without widening the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the rear decorative substrate 3114, the amount of rearward protrusion of the leg portion 3113f can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted from the main body portion. The light can be made to enter the inside 3113a, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with brighter light.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be Since the angle can be close to vertical with respect to the front surface, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made brighter. The effect similar to the above can be exhibited by luminous decoration.

Furthermore, since part of the light from the first LEDs 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed backward in the rear decorative substrate 3114, the first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 Compared to the case where projections for reflection protrude forward on the light emitting surface side of , the shadow of the projections due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, and the part of the shadow becomes dark. Instead, the entire back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the back decoration substrate 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be easily formed compared to the case where the substrate body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting, pressing, or the like. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portion 3113f is the copper foil of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f due to vibrations in the pachinko machine 1, the friction causes the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) to wear out. It will not peel or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit for light emission of the first LED 3114a or the like, or short circuit due to the peeled copper foil 3114d. The desired light emission performance can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, since the white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the white color of the coating film reflects forward the light irradiated to the front side of the rear decorative substrate 3114. By brightening the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with brighter light emission.

In addition, the white coating film allows the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b provided on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the circuit pattern, etc. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of making the decoration of the back movable decoration 3110 look good and sufficiently exhibiting the decoration effect because the decoration can be made difficult to see through.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate-shaped plate provided between the decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 and the back rear decoration substrate 3114 Because the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the penetrating first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted. , Compared to the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted are formed in a bottomed concave shape that does not penetrate, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can increase the volume (heat volume) of the space into which is inserted, and can diffuse the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (thermal volume) of the space into which the first LEDs 3114a are inserted can be increased. Heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since the heat from the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b can be made difficult to be accumulated, the accumulated heat makes the light emission of the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b unstable, and the first LED3114a and the second LED3114b Damage can be reduced, the first LED 3114 a and the second LED 3114 b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the decoration body 3111 (back rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reliably illuminated, and the player can be entertained by the illumination decoration (illumination performance) by the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is arranged so as to be continuous with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a that emits light in the direction along the front surface is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. The leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the main body portion 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114, so that the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are brought into contact with each other. Since a gap is formed between and, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heat from accumulating from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and reduce the unstable light emission and damage. As described above, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can surely illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, and the luminous decoration (luminous performance) by the back rear movable decorative body 3110. can be enjoyed by the player and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear decorative substrate 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110, by moving the rear movable decorative body 3110, the generation of wind Since the front side and the rear side of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be ventilated to release the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. is difficult to accumulate. It is possible to reduce the unstable light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b due to the accumulated heat and damage to the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. Operation and effects can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e does not affect the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to reduce the heat from the electronic component 3114e, prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from malfunctioning due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and achieve the same effects as described above.

In addition, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a narrow portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light guide radiation plate 3113 can be made difficult to be damaged.

In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c correspond to the light guide radiation plate 3113, respectively. The rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate body 3114c can be brought as close as possible by inserting them into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. , the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reduced.

In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, it can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration body 3111 (the rear movable decoration body 3110), and to improve the appearance of the rear rear movable decoration body 3110 to sufficiently exhibit the decoration effect. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative projections 3111a (metal On the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d), the first LED 3114a is mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 with the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 interposed therebetween, and the metallic decorative portion 3111d is visible from the front to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3114a can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (rear-rear movable decorative body 3110) from being spoiled by the visible part 3113c, thereby avoiding the deterioration of the appearance and ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and prevent the player from losing interest in the decoration.

In addition, since the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a shape along the first decorative projection 3111a of the decoration 3111, even if the first LED housing portion 3113c can be seen through the decoration 3111, Since the first LED housing portion 3113c is along the first decorative projection 3111a, the first LED housing portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative projection 3111a, and the player can It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first LED housing part 3113c, and it is possible to avoid that the decorativeness of the decoration body 3111 is spoiled and the appearance deteriorates. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can exert the same functions and effects as described above.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative projection 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative projection 3111a (metal decoration 3111d), the metal decoration 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative projection 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate a portion of the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c with light, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is emitted from the first LEDs 3114a. Light is emitted into the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and the light emitted inside the main body portion 3113a in the direction along the front surface is emitted forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused in a wide range as much as possible at a portion behind the third decorative projection 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward. A wide range of the decorative projections 3111c can be decorated with uniform brightness, and the third decorative projections 3111c surrounded by the metal decorative portions 3111d of the decorative body 3111 can be made more conspicuous. The decoration effect can be exhibited more, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decoration body 3111 (back rear movable decoration body 3110), thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest. At this time, since light is emitted from the first LEDs 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point-like light source of the first LEDs 3114a can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. can be reduced. As described above, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be evenly decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111, and the game is aroused. can be suppressed.

In addition, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is decorated with light emission by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first LEDs 3114 of the rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 Since the leg portion 3113f projecting backward is provided in the portion irradiated with the light from the LED 3114a, the area of the portion (light receiving portion 3113i) irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a is widened by the leg portion 3113f. This allows more light from the first LED 3114 a to enter the main body portion 3113 a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 . Therefore, the body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can radiate more light forward from the first LED 3114a, so that the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated with brighter light. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing interest by showing the player the luminous decoration with a higher production effect.

In addition, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decoration portion 3111d. , the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be varied across the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portions 3111d). More specifically, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth, A portion of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a by its inner peripheral surface, and the rest of the light is emitted toward the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Then, when the light radiated to the inside of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, the inner peripheral surface causes a part of the light to enter the first LED housing portion 3113c. , and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light inside the main body portion 3113a attempts to pass through the first LED housing portion 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED housing portion 3113c, if only the first LEDs 3114a on one side emit light, the one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing portion 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes dark, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side is made to emit light, the other side becomes brighter than the first LED housing portion 3113c and the one side becomes darker, and when both the first LEDs 3114a are made to emit light, the first LED housing portion 3113c becomes brighter on both sides. Further, since the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, the first LEDs 3114a are appropriately caused to emit light so that the metal decoration portion 3111d serves as a boundary. It is possible to illuminate only one side, illuminate only the other side, or illuminate both sides, so that the player can see a variety of lighting effects, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored and lose interest. can be suppressed.

Since each of the plurality of third decorative projections 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative projection 3111a), the first decorative projection 3111a is formed between the third decorative projections 3111c. The light from the first LED 3114a for decorating the other third decorative projection 3111c with light reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind this portion. Therefore, only the predetermined third decorative projections 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be illuminated in a favorable state. Therefore, it is possible to make the plurality of third decorative projections 3111c luminous decoration in a predetermined order, or to suggest a predetermined message to the player by luminous decoration of a special third decorative projection 3111c. Therefore, it is possible to show the player more colorful lighting effects, to prevent the player from getting tired of the game, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when the second LED 3114b of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is caused to emit light, the light passes through the second LED housing portion 3113d through which the light guide radiation plate 3113 penetrates, and directly reaches the rear surface of the decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112). As a result, the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is irradiated with the light from the second LED 3114b can be brighter than the portion that is decorated with the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since it is possible to show to the player the portion that is planarly decorated with the first LED 3114a and the portion that is decorated with the dot-like light emission with the second LED 3114b, the luminous decoration of the decoration body 3111 can be sharpened. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, enhance the performance effect of the luminous decoration, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as described above, the metal decoration portion 3111d can make the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c difficult to see from the front. Even if the dimension (thickness) of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exhibited. Therefore, the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the rear surface of the back-rear decoration substrate 3114 in the back-rear movable decoration 3110 can be reduced, so that the back-rear movable decoration in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. 3110 can be arranged more freely.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decoration body 3111 in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decoration Three decorative projections each having a curved front surface, a second decorative projection 3111b projecting smaller than the projection 3111a and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting smaller than the second decorative projection 3111b. Since the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a has a metal decorative portion 3111d by foil stamping, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. That is, since one decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d and the transparent portion (light-transmitting decoration portion) is formed, the structure is such that the metal decoration portion and the light-transmitting decoration portion are assembled in the conventional manner. Since there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction, and as a result, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1, so that the decorative body 3111 can be arranged in a part that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the decorative body 3111 is arranged at an unexpected part, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, the pachinko machine can be easily selected by the player as the pachinko machine to be played, and appeal to the player. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

In addition, a metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a of the three decoration projections of the decoration body 3111, and the metal decoration portion follows the front surface of the first decoration projection 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light inside the pachinko machine 1 and the light inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration part 3111d can be glittered. In addition to being able to make it shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (the first decorative projection part 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration part 3111d with three-dimensional effect gives a high-class feeling (premium feeling) to the player. can strongly attract the interest of

When the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has different metallic luster in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the feeling of depth can be increased for the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can make it easier to attract the player's interest.

In addition, the transparent decoration body 3111 has a first decorative projection 3111a, a second decorative projection 3111b, and a third decorative projection 3111c with different amounts of forward projection. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, the three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts can give the decoration of the decorative body 3111 a three-dimensional effect. As a result, the three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be presented to the player. can reduce the dimension in the front-rear direction of the decoration body 3111, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decoration body 3111 can be increased, and the decoration effect of the decoration body 3111 can be fully exhibited, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be achieved.

In addition, a metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the first decoration projection 3111a that projects most forward among the decoration projections of the decoration body 3111, and the portion of the metal decoration portion 3111d projects most forward. To make the part 3111d stand out more, to make the difference in appearance between the metal decoration part 3111d and parts other than the metal decoration part 3111d appear larger, and to give the decoration of the decoration body 3111 a more three-dimensional effect. can be done. Therefore, even if the dimension of the decoration body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be displayed. The pachinko machine 1 that can be played can be easily realized.

Furthermore, as described above, the dimension of the decoration 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced (thickness is reduced) to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement. Since many presentation members are provided, various presentations can be presented to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and reducing interest.

In addition, since the first decorative projection 3111a is provided with the metal decoration 3111d, the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decoration 3111d, protrude forward. The resulting lens effect imparts a sense of depth to the pattern of the decoration on the decoration sheet 3112 provided behind, and the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 make the decoration with a more three-dimensional effect visible to the player. be able to. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 is sheet-like, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. As described above, it is possible to provide a production member (rear rear movable decorative body 3110) composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a thin thickness in the front-rear direction, and a pachinko machine having the same effects as described above. can be 1.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b can be It is possible to reduce the rear side of the decorative body 3111 being seen through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decoration body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decoration body 3111 can be obscured by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. This can be avoided, and the decoration effect of the decoration of the decoration body 3111 can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the first decorative projections. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of 3111a. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decoration sheet 3112 outside the metal decoration portion 3111d in a front view, the metal decoration portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. 3111d can be shown wide. For this reason, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 make it possible to show the player a decoration with a higher decorative effect, and the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the attention of the player is provided. can provide.

Furthermore, since the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case of immersion in a plating bath or vapor deposition of vaporized metal. , an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the hot stamping device for foil-stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d is equipped with a flat elastic hot plate, the hot plate contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When it comes into contact with the hot plate, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to take on a shape that follows the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred to the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. It can be transferred (foil stamped) in good condition so that it adheres to the surface. In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first comes into contact with the front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a, and the transfer sheet is pulled. Therefore, the metal foil can be transferred neatly without wrinkles, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be made to have a good appearance.

In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different, the transfer sheet can be transferred without exchanging the hot plate. of metal foil can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc., and to suppress an increase in costs.

Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is elastic, the hot plate moves to the first decorative protrusion according to the distance to move the hot plate toward the decorative body 3111 side. Depending on the strength with which the first decorative projection 3111a is pressed, the amount (depth) of the first decorative projection 3111a immersed into the hot plate can be varied, and the hot plate in the first decorative projection 3111a (decorative body 3111) can be changed. can be widened or narrowed. That is, it is possible to freely change the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (decorative protrusion projecting forward). As a result, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided due to model change, design change, etc., the range of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative amount of movement of the hot plate. can.

Further, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate makes it possible to freely change the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (first decorative projection 3111a, etc.). When the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the decorative projection 3111b, the metal decorative portion 3111d can have different colors between the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b. More specifically, in the prior art, when it is attempted to form metal decoration portions of different colors on one member (decoration body), for example, after forming a metal layer of a first color on the entire surface, a masking process is performed. By forming a second color metal layer over the entire surface and removing the masking, it is possible to differentiate the color between the masked and unmasked areas. Alternatively, after forming a first color metal layer on the entire surface, a second color metal layer is formed thereon, and a part of the second color metal layer is peeled off by laser peeling or the like. The color can be made different between the peeled portion and the non-peeled portion. However, even if any of the techniques as described above are used, there is a problem that the manufacture of the decorative body is troublesome and the cost increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate can freely change the range of foil stamping on the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the like. Using the transfer sheet having the metal foil of the color of , the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed in the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is transferred to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a second color metal foil, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is immersed without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The hot plate is moved so as to transfer the second color metal foil to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, it is possible to easily form the metal decorative portion 3111d having different colors for the first decorative projection 3111a and the second decorative projection 3111b, suppress an increase in cost, and further improve decorativeness. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping, the metal foil is left unpeeled in areas other than the metal decoration portion 3111d, compared to the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is left by laser peeling. Therefore, deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the front surface of the decoration 3111 to be peeled has unevenness such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser varies depending on the position of the decoration 3111. As a result, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion distant from (or close to) the focal length by more than a predetermined amount, resulting in unsatisfactory appearance due to residual peeling. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at the required portion by foil stamping, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after foil stamping to form a transparent portion, which makes the appearance better. A decoration 3111 can be formed.

In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased. position) and an appearance position visible from the player side. The appearance (visibility) of the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) with high decorativeness can make the player think that something good will happen, and gives the player a sense of anticipation for the game. can be made to raise and the decline of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100, the flat plate-like decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration part 3111d on the front surface is provided with a flat light guide radiation plate. 3113 and the rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer circumference of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is extended. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decoration base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the rear decoration substrate 3114, the distance from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 is large. The root of the creepage distance EL advances rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, turns back inside the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b, advances forward between the flange portions 3113b and 3115b, At the front end of the portion 3115b, it becomes a meandering route that turns back to the inside of the flange portion 3115b. distance) at which it is possible to block At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, and a back and rear decorative substrate 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b for decorating the decorative body 3111 with light emission are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110 which tends to generate static electricity by moving in the vertical direction, the movable decorative body 3110 Static electricity is easily accumulated, and when static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at once because of its high conductivity, and the discharge voltage increases, so that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b However, as described above, since the creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the rear decoration substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long, the metal decoration portion 3111d It is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the back from being discharged to the rear decorative substrate 3114, and prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114. Thus, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 having the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reliably decorated with light emission, and the player can see the light emission decoration ( luminous effect) can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative body 3111 of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward so as to form a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative substrate 3114 is increased by the length of the front-rear direction of the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

In addition, since the rear side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is covered with the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in other members (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decoration base 3115 from being discharged to the rear decoration substrate 3114. Damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. of the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to the discharge of static electricity can be more reliably prevented.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern on the rear decorative substrate 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with (the leg portion 3113f of) the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f, the metal decorative portion The creeping distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be increased even a little, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibrations from inside and outside the pachinko machine 1 act. However, friction does not occur between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear out and break the circuit. It is possible to prevent the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from not emitting light.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to give a high-class feeling by the luster of the metal decoration part 3111d, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be used as the second decoration projection. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making a decoration 3111 (rear rear movable decoration 3110) conspicuous by luminous decoration of a part 3111b and a third decoration projection 3111, and strongly attracting a player's interest. can be done.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward in a predetermined decorative shape, the metal decorative portion 3111d is given a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of making the decoration part 3111d more conspicuous, enhancing the high-class feeling of the metal decoration part 3111d, and strongly attracting the attention of the players.

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 doubly surround the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion. 3113b and the flange portion 3115b can be hidden from the player's side, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is diffused and Since the metal decoration portion 3111d, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be irradiated with light from the light, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated with uniform brightness. Thus, the appearance of the luminous decoration can be improved, and the performance effect by the luminous performance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be further enhanced, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. .

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates it forward, Part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light. It is possible to make it more difficult to see from the player side, and the flange part 3113b is also decorated with light emission, so that the appearance of the light emission decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved, and the player can be entertained and entertained. A decrease can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable decorative body 3170, and the back movable decorative body 3180 can also achieve the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100, a transparent light guide radiation A plate 3113 and a rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided. The side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated therein. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decorative substrate 3114 are caused to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. Light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 passes through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that constitute the decorative members, and is irradiated forward, so that the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The light-emitting decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) are decorated with light.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration body Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are decorated with light emission, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 compared to the case where the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the front. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114 a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 . Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is caused to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of point-like light emission. The sheet 3112 can be evenly decorated with luminescence to make it look beautiful, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the plate-like decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is reduced. This makes it easy to secure a space for arranging the back rear movable decoration 3110, and arranges other production members (back upper front rotary decoration 3410, back upper rear rotary decoration 3440, etc.). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can easily secure a space for playing and which can entertain the players more by providing various performance members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has embossed portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first outline portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decorative portion 3150, and the embossed portion can provide a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be imparted to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind by the lens effect. Therefore, the embossed portion of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration (decorative portion 3150) with a sense of depth. Even if the dimension in the front-rear direction) is reduced, the decoration effect does not decrease, and the player's interest can be attracted and entertained. It is possible to reliably achieve the effects described above.

In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first contour portion 3112a behind the decoration body 3111 having embossed portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the transparent decoration 3112 is provided, the decoration 3111 can be made to look like it is colored with the pattern color of the decoration sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decoration 3111, and the cost of the decoration 3111 can be reduced. can be made In addition, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration portion 3150) of the decoration body 3111 (rear rear movable decoration body 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily adapted.

In addition, the first outline portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light. Light from the hologram of the first contour portion 3112a, light from other LEDs and effect display devices 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. By hitting the portion of , a predetermined hologram can be seen by the interference fringes of light, so the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram Thus, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to a part of the decorative part 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the movable decorative body 3110 is made thin, the player does not feel thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the holograms are the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having the embossed portion such as 3111c, the lens effect of the embossed portion can impart a sense of depth to the pattern such as the hologram, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique to form the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

In addition, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the transparent decorative body The pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be used to decorate up to the outer periphery of the 3111, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (the decorative part 3150), the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is given a sense of openness. It can be used and can make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the movable rear decorative body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the movable rear decorative body can be exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be provided.

Since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, light is generated between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The pattern of the first contour part 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to minimize the front-to-rear dimension of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and realizing the above-described effects.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the external shape of the decorative body 3111, and the design of the decorative sheet 3112 can decorate up to the outer peripheral edge of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the members adjacent to the rear movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It is possible to show the game, to give the player a visual impact to draw attention to the player, and to entertain the player with a large decoration, thereby suppressing the loss of the player's interest.

In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodation portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 are accommodated from behind, the light guide radiation plate 3113 accommodates the first LEDs 3114a. By accommodating the first LED 3114a in the portion 3113c from the rear, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be brought as close as possible, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved forward and backward. The thickness in the direction can be made thin, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably embodied.

In addition, the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodation portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodation portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, compared to the case where light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where light from the outer peripheral surface does not easily reach. However, by providing the first LED housing part 3113c in the part and irradiating the light from the inner surface, the part can be brightly emitted, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) can be evenly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side-view type, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and emitting light. A pachinko machine 1 capable of emitting light from the inner surface (light receiving portion 3113i) of the portion 3113c in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having the above-described effects is surely realized. be able to.

In addition, substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e. Even if the decoration (decorative part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflecting part 3113e, and the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be easily dealt with. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

It should be noted that the back movable decorative body 3160 and the back movable decorative body 3170 can also achieve the same effect as described above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the game machine is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used. and the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusion portion 3112c, and the second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but limited to this not something to do. For example, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 may be made into one decoration member, and the decoration part 3150 may be provided on the decoration member.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a receiving port (general prize winning port, starting port, variable winning port (variable starting port, large When a game medium is received in the receiving slot, the player receives benefits (payout of the game medium, open/close operation of the variable winning slot, etc.). Since the occurrence of an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) is given, the player can enjoy the operation of inserting the game medium so that the game medium can be received in the desired receiving port. ing. As a game machine of this kind, there is a decorative member whose surface is plated with metal and a notch penetrating back and forth is closed by a transparent lens portion; and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the brilliance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decoration of the decorative member (lens portion) by the light emission of the LEDs can enhance the interest of the player. can attract and entertain By the way, in the case of a decorative member having a metal decoration portion by metal plating on the surface, as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decoration portion has high conductivity. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at once, and the voltage (discharge voltage) of the discharge (spark) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member plated with metal, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible, so the decorative member ( There is a risk that static electricity accumulated in the metal plating will be discharged between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, causing sparks. Therefore, sparks (discharge) are generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, which damages the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, making it impossible to perform the luminous decoration (luminous effect) of the decorative member. As a result, the player cannot be entertained, and there is a risk that the player's interest is lowered.

[Method of electrical connection between body frame and game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided on the body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board that is connected to the main body frame 4, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is played. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 .

For example, the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN of the main body frame 4 will be described. In addition, a box-shaped main body DCNa elongated in the left-right direction is provided, and a plate-like base body DCNb elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear surface side of the box-shaped main body DCNa to form an alphabetic T shape as a whole. there is

Around the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is provided from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa for a predetermined distance. Inclined portions DCNaaa are respectively formed for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. The game board side drawer connectors of the game board 5 are connected to the central part (one place) and the left and right parts (one place on the left part and one place on the right part) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. (convex type) is turned upside down in a direction different from the normal direction and inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is prevented from being turned upside down and inserted into the DCN. The horizontal position of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 when it is inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the correct direction. A groove DCNaab is formed from the vicinity of the front surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa to prevent misalignment and enhance the engagement between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5. They are formed toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, pin-type terminals PN are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction) in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface. ) passes through the box-like body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side relay board KB (see Fig. 209), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is first inserted into the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end is crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

Also, on the back surface of the base body DCNb, when mounting the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the body frame side drawer connector is mounted on the body frame side relay board. A cylindrical protruding portion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in the regular direction.

In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Inline Package) type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side are electrically connected to connect the game board via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the body frame 4 .

In addition, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the body frame 4, and various power supplies from the power supply board 630 It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) supplied to various boards provided on the game board 5, and is shown separately from the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' not shown is provided on a body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) that is separate from the body frame side relay board KB. This body frame side relay board KB' is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN'. type small connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative substrate and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). By electrically connecting each terminal PN of (concave type) DCN', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and a door are connected via a DIP type small connector and a wiring (harness) not shown. Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals are formed by various decorative substrates, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 . The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) is the same as that of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) is the same as the method of fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). there is

Also, a method of fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown); Another game board side relay board (not shown) of another game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (this other game board side relay board is , the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The fixing method to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method (fixing method using rivets) to the body frame side relay board KB.

The use of rivets when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is because the drawer connector is used to connect the game board 5 to the main body. Although the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be electrically connected automatically just by mounting the game board 5 on the frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer of the game board 5 is removed. A large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side. This is to prevent the soldered surface of the terminal PN from peeling off from the rear surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). A bolt and nut are used to fix the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) is shown in the figure. In the case of fixing to the game board side relay board which does not, there is a drawback that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the body frame 4.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, a pin type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. However, if a bellows type terminal and contact are used, the following problems arise. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows in the contacts for various power supply lines) are welded. becomes. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in this welded state, the contact of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN may be bent and broken, or the game board 5 may be broken. When removing from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contact is peeled off and damaged, making the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts are welded together, the connector may be damaged, which may cause various control boards to malfunction or damage the electronic components mounted on the various control boards. problem that needs to be established.

In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals PN for the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN. In other words, even if an operator mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, solder short-circuit prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 209 shows diagrams (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridges of terminals of the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. FIGS. 4(d) to 4(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the miniature connector of FIG. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing. Also, in FIG. 209, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

As described above, the body frame side relay board KB arranged at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4 includes the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 as well as this body frame side drawer connector ( Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are pin type terminals arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the horizontal direction of the body frame side relay board KB. and a columnar projecting portion DCNbb are arranged (predetermined position for drawer connector), whereas the DIP type small connector is arranged in the vertical direction on the body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type small connector Each terminal lined up in two rows of the small connector is arranged so that each terminal PN lined up in two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is rotated 90 degrees (predetermined position for small connector) .

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, each of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. Terminals PN are inserted into through holes KTH1 having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “lands KTH1”), and the columnar projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the positioning hole. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN's mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with each other to form the main body. Rivets (not shown) are inserted from the front of the frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN into the mounting through-holes DCNba, DCNba, respectively, and the ends are crimped and fixed to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame-side relay board KB. . When a DIP type small connector is placed on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector is provided with a through hole KTH2 having a land. (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at the predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are two stages in the vertical direction, the first stage from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for a small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, there are six stages in the vertical direction, and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in the first row, two terminals PN in the second row on the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN on the third row on the third row from the bottom, and two terminals PN on the fourth row from the bottom Two terminals PN in the fourth row, two terminals PN in the fifth row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the fifth row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. becomes.

On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector, and a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed to the body frame side by flowing the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB to the solder bath. To be able to solder to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the substrate KB, and to solder each terminal and each land KTH2 of the DIP type small connector to the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay substrate KB on the body frame side. can be done.

The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from the bottom of the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. It is directed to the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row, and is the first row from the bottom from the two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the small DIP type connector. It is oriented toward the two terminals of the first row. In other words, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final row, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the terminals in the final stage.

When the back surface (solder surface) of the board is poured into the solder bath, pin-type terminals such as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and DIP type small connector terminals are aligned and placed in the solder bath. If the solder is flown downward, there is a risk that solder bridges will occur along the flow direction, particularly between the terminal in the final stage and the terminal in the preceding stage. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal in the final stage.

In the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. Each land KTH1 is connected to a rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 whose width is the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row) is connected to the solder escape pattern KNP1. They are formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB so that the land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are electrically connected.

In the DIP type compact connector, as described above, the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the final stage. The solder escape pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the same as the outer diameter of the land KTH2 is connected (that is, each land KTH2 of the two terminals in the first row and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are connected to each other). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other), and are formed on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB.

Thus, by forming a solder escape pattern on the terminal in the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridging in the terminal in the final stage and contribute to the prevention of solder short-circuiting. may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing), A method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each stage by silk printing and printing vertical lines on the boundaries of the lands and solder escape patterns of the terminals adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction (countermeasure 2 by silk printing), silk printing on the resist A method of enclosing the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure by printing and painting the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be mentioned.

[Measure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each step by silk printing on a resist (countermeasure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN. In other words, the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH1, which looks like a mountain range. A horizontal line KSH1 at the boundary between six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical direction by the force of separating the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the wall.

As shown in FIG. 209(d), each terminal of the small DIP type connector has two terminals in the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals in the fifth row from the bottom. and a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between and, two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth row, which are the eyes, and the fourth row, which is the fourth row from the bottom. a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of and the two terminals of the third row which is the third row from the bottom, A horizontal line KSH2 is drawn by silk-printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. Soldering surface) KBy, horizontal line KSH2 by silk printing on the boundary between two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. In other words, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. are connected. For this reason, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and cross the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which is like a mountain range. , two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom. Solder bridging can be suppressed in terminals adjacent to each other in the vertical direction by exerting a force to separate the solder when the solder tends to stay in the resist due to the wall. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row on the fifth row from the bottom and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row on the fourth row from the bottom; A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the third row from the bottom; A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between two terminals and lands KTH2 and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals and lands KTH2 in the second row from the bottom and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row, the vertical wall of the horizontal line KSH2, which looks like a mountain range, causes the solder to stay on the resist and separate the solder. Due to the force acting thereon, solder bridges can be suppressed in the vertically adjacent terminals and lands KTH2.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a horizontal line is printed on the boundary of each stage by silk printing on the resist, and a vertical line is printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to the left and right and the solder escape pattern. A method (measure 2 by silk printing) of printing on the boundary of each will be described. In countermeasure 2 by silk printing, in addition to countermeasure 1 by silk printing, vertical lines are printed by silk printing on the lands of the terminals adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundaries of the solder escape patterns adjacent in the left-right direction. Measure 1 by silk printing will be omitted.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row from the bottom, the terminals PN and lands KTH1 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction; A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. In other words, the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV1, which looks like a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV1 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV1. Due to the force that separates the solder at , it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the laterally adjacent terminals PN and lands KTH1 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP1.

In addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. From the two terminals and lands KTH2 in one row to the two terminals and lands KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2. In other words, the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB by silk printing. Vertical walls are connected. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the vertical wall of the vertical line KSV2, which is like a mountain range. The solder flowing on the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2 tries to stay in the resist by flowing to the left side of the vertical wall or the right side of the vertical wall across the vertical wall like a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2. As a result, a force for separating the solder acts, so that solder bridges can be suppressed in the laterally adjacent terminals and lands KTH2 and in the laterally adjacent solder escape patterns KNP2.

[Measure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridging, a method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by silk printing on the resist and painting the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , is surrounded by a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. Print to fill the area excluding the area. That is, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are enclosed in a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled in, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 can be seen from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder. The escape pattern KNP1 is a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When the solder flows, it cannot get over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which becomes a depressed area, and tries to stay there. Accordingly, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

As shown in FIG. 209(f), in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are connected to the body frame side relay board KB. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction by silk printing, and of the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape, the area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 is painted out. Print. That is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a rectangular area KSA2 by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be filled in, when each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are viewed from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 becomes a recessed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and to prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When the solder flows, it tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2 silk-printed from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which becomes a depressed area, and the force of separating the solder acts. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the direction and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

Compared to connectors that have not been subjected to measures 1 to 3 by silk printing, the silk-printed parts are extremely conspicuous, so solder bridges are formed on the board. When performing the work of visually confirming whether or not an error has occurred, the worker can quickly direct his or her line of sight because the marker serves as a mark for where to look on the board.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, when the board is flown into the solder bath, countermeasures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above are applied to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and to prevent solder short circuits. Countermeasures 1 to 3 can also be used as a mark indicating which connector the worker directly solders to the board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the board is flowed into the solder bath, the countermeasure 3 by silk printing described above is applied, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a rectangular shape shown in FIG. 209(c). In the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small connector, the area KSA2 enclosed in the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may be used to prevent solder bridging and prevent solder short-circuiting. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). 210 that are the same as those in FIG. 209 are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the solid arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the substrate is poured into the solder bath, and the dashed-dotted arrow indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , and is surrounded by silk printing on the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side. Printing is performed so as to fill the area except for the escape pattern KNP1. In addition, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flowed into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1', and the land KTH1 and the solder escape pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows into the lands, the solder is separated from the lands KTH1 and the solder escape patterns KNP1, which are recessed areas, by trying to stay without getting over the small plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. By applying force, it is possible to suppress solder bridges in the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 210(b), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and each shape of each solder escape pattern KNP2. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the relay board KB on the body frame side is surrounded by a shape about three times larger by silk printing, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2' surrounded by this shape. print so as to fill the area Also, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB is flown into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2'. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2', and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which is a recessed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows into the lands KTH2 and the solder escape patterns KNP2, which are recessed areas, the solder tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the area KSA2' silk-printed from the lands KTH2 and the solder escape patterns KNP2. Accordingly, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and in the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. may be formed by FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modification in which the terminal in the final stage and the solder escape pattern are formed apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN at the final stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertically long land KTH1. A predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. good too. This solder escape pattern KNP1' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the land KTH2 through which the final stage terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the width of the land KTH2, which is elongated in the horizontal direction, is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A solder escape pattern KNP2' having a rectangular shape (which may have a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a distance of 1 to 1/2 of the length. This solder escape pattern KNP2' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. The solder escape pattern KNP1'' has a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a semicircular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is the outer diameter of the land KTH1. and may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1. ) on the copper foil surface of the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns or a solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the land KTH2 that is long in the left-right direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2'' having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2), and the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2'' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. Solder escape pattern KNP1''' having a rectangular shape whose width is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and has a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1 (a rectangular shape whose one side is as large as the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and may have a triangular shape on the opposite side of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211(c), the land KTH2 through which the terminal at the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the land KTH2 that is long in the left-right direction and whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2. A rectangular solder escape pattern KNP2''' having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2 (having a rectangular shape whose one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH2). ) and are spaced apart by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) on the rear surface of the body frame side relay board KB ( (Solder surface) KBy may be formed on the copper foil surface. This solder escape pattern KNP2''' is in an insulated state without being electrically connected to various wiring patterns and solid ground.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the solder relief pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escaping pattern on the opposite side that is not exposed may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)).

In addition, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the board is flowed into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed-dotted arrows in FIGS. 209(a) to (c)) is determined in advance. If the board can be flowed in the opposite direction as well as in this direction (that is, if the board can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), take measures 1 to 3 by silk printing described above. It is also possible to prevent solder short-circuiting by preventing the occurrence of solder bridging. In this case, depending on the flow direction, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side, which is not connected to the terminal in the final stage, is semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)). See also.) Also, the terminal in the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector in the direction in which the board is flown into the solder bath. Further, when designing a board, if it is not known in which direction the board is to be flowed, the above-described solder escape patterns are formed in both directions so that the board can be flowed in either direction.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the game machine described in this document, various boards are flowed into a solder bath and the terminals of components are soldered. was there.

[Prevention of stripping by over resist]
Next, prevention of stripping by over resist will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. FIG. First, the over resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described, and the over resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over resist applied to each terminal of a drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, and a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing.

[Over-resisting applied to each terminal of drawer connector (concave type) on main body frame side]
The over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side will be explained. As shown in FIGS. KTH1") has a through hole formed in the base material KBo of the body frame side relay board KB, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, By removing the copper foil from the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, lands each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. They have an outer diameter KTHD1 and have the same size.

On the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. In addition, although a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, the back surface (solder surface) is not formed. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1.

In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and a substrate ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB (GND) (that is, solid ground) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) by a through hole (not shown).

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having a is applied. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist. can be made uniform.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer periphery of the land KTH1 is covered with resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. It is As a result, the resist covers the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 from multiple directions. can be made uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surfaces, compared to the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is less. and solder joints are stronger.

By the way, when fixing the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. By using the drawer connector, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically established simply by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4; Since a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 when it is attached to the frame 4, this This is to prevent the soldered surfaces of the pin-type terminals PN in the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side from peeling off from the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board KB on the body frame side due to a large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is separated from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are separated from the base material KBo together with the lands KTH1. may do so.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the rear surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, over resist is applied to the land KTH1 to form copper. By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to connect the drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side by attaching or removing the game board 5. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB is the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and peeling of various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

The outer diameter KTHD1 of the over-resisted land KTH1 takes into consideration the area where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of a land without over resist. This is because when the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is soldered to the land KTH1 on which over resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN This is to make the bonding area larger than that in the case of soldering to a land that is not over-resisted. As a result, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over resist is applied can be made greater than the bonding strength to the land on which the over resist is not applied.

Depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, when over-resist is not applied, the land has a normal outer diameter, and when over-resist is applied, it has a normal size. It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the normal size at the board design stage. There is a problem in that the connection between the substrate and the land becomes insufficient, and solder failure may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a board having even one land to which over-resisting is applied (for example, main body frame side relay board KB), all lands are , the same land as the land subjected to over resist is arranged as a land not subjected to over resist. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land becomes sufficient, and the occurrence of defective soldering can be reliably prevented.

It should be noted that the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted is also provided with a land. is subjected to the above-described over resist. In addition to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, there is another main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) connected to the main body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) separately from the main body frame side relay board KB. The above-described over-resist is applied to the lands of the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown). In addition, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (this other game board drawer connector (convex type) is connected to the main body frame A side drawer connector (concave type) which is different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the DCN) is mounted on another game board side relay board (not shown) (this The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay board (not shown) in which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. which is different from the substrate), the above-described over resist is applied to the lands.

In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB are different. Although the outer diameter is KTHD1 and has the same size, compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the body frame side relay board KB The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the surface) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resisting, for a board (for example, main body frame side relay board KB) having at least one land to which over-resisting is applied, all lands are , the same land as the land on which over resist is applied is arranged as a land without over resist. A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 that is being used) may be placed. In other words, lands to which over-resist is applied and lands having an outer diameter of a normal size when over-resist is not applied may coexist. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over resist, even if the outer diameter of the land through which the terminal is inserted is the same, the land having the outer diameter of a normal size without over resist and the land having an outer diameter of normal size with over resist applied It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over-resist applied to fixed land of surface mount type connector housing]
213(a), (b), and FIGS. 214(c), (d), the over resist applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC will be described. , a pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered; various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP; A vertically elongated rectangle fixed by soldering both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) to the surface (mounting surface) of the board KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby attaching each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and fixing each housing. Pads KSPF are formed respectively. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

Each pad KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP are connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) is electrically unconnected and insulated from On the other hand, the four corners of each housing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each housing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. A thermal pattern KCxb is provided in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. With this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC (mounting surface) KCx. It is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder from being removed from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF when the KSPF is soldered. Both sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC, the fixing of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC can be strengthened compared to the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. Both sides of the housing of the surface mounting type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) of the housing are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, and surface mounting is performed. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and the area corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. is formed with a housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF. A resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the housing fixing pad having a shape is formed, the housing fixing pad is formed from the outer circumference of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. An over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. As a result, on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each housing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist. can be uniform for loads from

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are more difficult than the bonding between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, in this embodiment, for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like can be mentioned as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted. Various wires and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on boards such as the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and cigarette tar accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, when performing various inspections, and the like. , is removed by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall, and then reconnected after work. However, in most cases, staff such as store clerks in amusement halls who perform such work are unfamiliar with handling boards. , may be done by brute force (that is, with excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. is mounted on the board KC, if a staff member such as a game hall clerk performs the work described above, the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN will be applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Due to this large force, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the substrate KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC separates from the substrate KCo. In some cases, the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp are peeled off from the substrate KCo together with the pads KSP.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not separate from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with inserting and removing the harness from the surface mount type connector KCN, the peel strength is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The housing fixing pad KSPF attached to the housing does not peel off from the base material KCo, and along with this, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC peels off from the base material KCo, It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, the above-described over resist is applied to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the substrate KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector into which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to the boards such as the control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply board 630, the interface board 635, various decoration boards, and various relay boards are mounted. The above-described over resist may be applied to housing fixing pads of substrates such as substrates and various drive substrates. When a load is applied to the board of the movable body by wiring or harnesses that are electrically connected to the board of the movable body as the body moves, the housing of the board of the movable body in which a surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-described over-resist may be applied to the fixing pad, and in the case of various switches having a pressing operation part and being a surface mount type that is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, various The above-described over resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, and if some external force is applied to the board, the resistance, capacitor, diode, transistor, IC, etc. The above-described over resist may be applied to the pads of the board to which various terminals of lead type or surface mount type electronic components are soldered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer circumference of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF Over-resisting was performed so that the outer peripheral portion of the housing fixing pad KSPF was covered with resist, but the over-resisting was not applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF, and the through hole had a land around the housing fixing pad KSPF. may be formed and over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modification, and a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. be. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of the B part of FIG. d) is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along line ZZ in c). 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing.

215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a), 215(a) and 215(a) show a modified example in which the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, but a plurality of through-holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land is over-resisted. 216(b) and FIGS. 216(c) and 216(d), each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape to be soldered. pads KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are attached to the surface of the substrate KC ( housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction fixed by soldering to the mounting surface), a plurality of through holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "lands KCTH"), The solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Various wiring patterns connected to KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each solid ground connection wiring pattern are formed. Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. The solid ground connection wiring pattern connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH and the solid ground also has a function as a thermal pattern for the housing fixing pad KSPF.

For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the right side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction so as to be adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF. For the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side, two rows of three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. Also, on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) resist layer KCyr. A backside (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. In this modified example, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same size. A substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and a substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) are electrically connected to each other through through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH in the area corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. ) side resist opening KBxra is formed, over resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is provided in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, over-resist is applied such that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. This makes it possible to increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp by applying over resist to each land KCTH does not separate from the substrate KCo.

As described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and the rows are adjacent to the right housing fixing pad KSPF. , and the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, and the left housing fixing pad KSPF are placed next to each other on the left side of the As a result, even if the housing fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, each land KCTH is over-resisted, so that the housing fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH form the solid ground connection wiring pattern described above. Due to the connection, even if the surface mount type connector KCN is subjected to the force associated with the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN, the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is formed. When the housing fixing pad KSPF attached is about to peel off from the base material KCo, the peeling strength is increased by each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. This makes it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to separate from the base material KCo.

In this modified example, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the rear surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, compared with the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC can be made larger or smaller. In addition, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the backside (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

In addition, in this modification, as described above, the right housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction. are arranged adjacent to each other on the right side of the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side. Although it is arranged so as to be adjacent to the left side of the housing fixing pad KSPF, instead of or together with this, two lands are provided on the right housing fixing pad KSPF at regular intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which KCTHs are arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the right housing fixing pad KSPF. Two rows in which two lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals may be arranged so as to be adjacent to each other above and/or below the housing fixing pad KSPF on the left side.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Since the connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring, for example, when a person unfamiliar with handling the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector, excessive force is applied. There was a problem that the copper foil on the board peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 . 218, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are inserted into the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. , but is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 having an open rear and a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 and an electric It has a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is directly connected, and a base body 1502 which closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, with peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining one-third area when cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. there is

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. , lower side, and right side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e projecting rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is slightly upper right in the center, and the air cooling fan FAN is attached at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, predetermined column-shaped through holes th1 to th4 are inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume control switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is defined as one closed, substantially horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) as a connector recess. 1501ac faces the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to protrude. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. formed. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged along its lower side when viewed from the front thereof so that the positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned by 1. Connector recess 1501ad is positioned lower than the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed oblong rectangular regions (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Further, the connector recess 1501ad and the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. are exposed from each other.

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae along its left side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a flexible flat cable (FFC) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected. An abbreviation for Cable, a flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) so that they cannot be touched, the wiring cover body 1503 can function. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are opened. are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing it in, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. As a result, cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal round head screw, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND). The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face of the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face of the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rf1 to 1530rf having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4 and copper foils for soldering (so-called lands) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed toward the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are closed. are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to secure the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other. The seat surface of the pan head screw made of , and are in contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. are electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal round head screw, thereby grounding the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the rear surface side and the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is designed to be

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (the cover plate 1501a A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap (2.3 mm in this embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. FIG. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 A gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501, and a gap formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control switches 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ) are smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be kept small.

When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes air to be sucked in through the blades. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1) on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned along the lower side at predetermined intervals so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the peripheral control board Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wires to these connectors CN2 to CN7 (positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals). Disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that are elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501, the above-described peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding various ROM functions) and effect display control unit 1512 (various ROM functions). ), CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces etc. A peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs capable of controlling the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting), and various schedule data that define the progress of the effects. (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above), and the peripheral data provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 An SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in the ROM 1520a, and a slide system capable of adjusting the volume. A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is off, a power supply generation circuit (not shown) for producing various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. I have it. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, using SPI communication and I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 (for example, various motors and various solenoids, communicating via the connector CN6.) and door frames Send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, or send drive data to the game board 5 side light emission data to the LED control IC for a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side , receives signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (via connector CN3 are communicating.) as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530 are further provided. I have it. A surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . A surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there are LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +37V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +37V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surface of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs respectively, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided on the 1530x are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is oriented forward and backward when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1 . The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not face the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the 1501a.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the plug and the socket are connected. Mate. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket moves forward and backward (pachinko machine 1 The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the direction of the rear surface and the front surface of the housing. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the .

Here, the reason for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral data ROM 1520a (function of the image ROM of the effect display control section 1512 described above, etc.). including.). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effects images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 socket on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the floating mechanism described above, along with this peripheral control board 1510, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the game effect (for example, An image to convey that a jackpot game state will occur which is more advantageous than the normal state, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey the fact that the game is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 socket provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 must be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with a floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and pushed in. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket from being damaged, and to reliably form the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the distance is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body can be operated) can be attached to the game board 5. It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are mounted. The mounting surface 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are directed toward the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a round head screw made by the manufacturer and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for constraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. This is because it can be absorbed with a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In the state where the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is covered with a metal (not shown). A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other (surface contact). The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. As described above, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are brought into a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) when viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the side) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

Among the above-described assembling methods, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the inner space of the cover body 1501, for example, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is first placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear side of the cover body 1501.) side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on (mounting surface) 1520x is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is moved to the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the body 1501 is viewed from the back). In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are, for example, multiple types of methods of video signals input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is employed, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "noise countermeasure effect by peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, there is no need to equip each substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which contributes to cost reduction of each substrate.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the multidirectional angle In order to confirm the state of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the top, they are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. can contribute to

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. can be checked through a vent 1501az having a In addition, the LEDML3, which is arranged near the special connector SCN1, maintains its lighting state when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have the function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply. The special connector SCN3 and the special connector SCN3 function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ) 1520x can contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided in the 1520x.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) are distributed and arranged so that As a result, modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be performed using a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the board-to-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to the improvement of sexuality.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have the product numbers and numbers printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c1, 1510c2 are designed so that the type and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the status of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thus, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) and the state of the IC pin.

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees and of a type with weak directivity. is adopted, it is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface facing the rear surface of the flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By turning on the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from the area on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and its surroundings, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the emitted light and direct it toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflecting portions (not shown) may be colored paint having a bright color such as white, or colored paint having gloss, or a metallic sheet having luster may be adhered.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. , the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become noise sources and be affected by noise. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is adopted. As a result, noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is suppressed by the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the like. Noise can be removed by flowing to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

[Partial removal of foil from solid ground]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND) except for the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying the power supply, and the area where various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a “solid ground”), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is also formed of a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. , are formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid earth"), in which the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are different from each other. A plurality of through-holes (both sides (front (mounting surface) and back (solder surface) of peripheral control board 1510) formed on both surfaces (top (mounting surface) and back (solder surface)) of 1510 (holes (copper The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a plated hole).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 along the lower side of the base plate 1502a at predetermined intervals. Position (that is, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510 protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the connector 1510, the force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at a position that does not interfere with the protruding terminals causes the peripheral Elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and disconnection of the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact), and disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 are formed. 1502aa3 are brought into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and connected to the same ground. Since it is configured to be the ground (GND), the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is sent to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) to remove the noise. It is possible to do so.

By the way, the front surfaces of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. A solid ground was formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this contacting portion, and the solid grounding was covered with a resist. A solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 in the contact portion is covered with a resist without forming a solid ground. 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in the abutting portion was covered with a resist instead of forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise intrudes through such an unexpected route, disconnection prevention ribs are formed on the base body 1502 to form electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components. If the front surfaces of the portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portions in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

In addition, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts which one of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 on the front side. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the noise will enter, it is difficult to place electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to these electronic components away from specific disconnection prevention ribs.

A high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid-state ground are in contact with each other through a resist in order to intrude into the brand, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise entering the base body 1502 is applied to the contacting portion. As a result, it is considered that an unnecessary loop wiring is formed through which electromagnetic noise enters from the disconnection prevention rib portion to the solid plane.

Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 abuts on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is solid. The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body contacts the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are, as shown in FIG. 1510yp respectively. In other words, a region where a part of the solid plane is removed (removed) is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

In these foil-free areas 1510ya, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to or greater than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. formed respectively. The length of the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg0 between the left side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the left side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in these foil extraction regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the right side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil extraction region 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is greater than or equal to the distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 in the horizontal direction. Each is formed The length of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of these foil extraction regions 1510ya and the upper side surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. is 1.5 times longer than the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the horizontal direction.

That is, by forming the foil extraction area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil extraction area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. Disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil extraction region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil extraction area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. No foil-punched regions of the same shape are formed at all.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) to form the same ground ( GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, noise entering the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed in the base body 1502 through the foil extraction region 1510ya to perform peripheral control. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed, which cannot penetrate into the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate, and the noise penetrates into the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 as described above. Noise can be removed by forming a "noise exiting route" that flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal pan screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control boards]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and is a board that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused).

As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is surrounded by circular soldering copper foil (so-called " lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and copper foils for soldering having a circular shape (so-called lands) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 faces the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface 1510x is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to open the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw (the bearing surface of the head).

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (the seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeatedly screwing and removing the metal pan screws. lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are rubbed against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The base of the peripheral control board 1510 rubs against the seat surface of the screw head (the seat surface of the head), and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 If the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board is exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot be reused due to oxidation and poor electrical connectivity. There is a problem of difficulty.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have They are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the bearing surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw are electrically connected together. It is covered so that it can be connected. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized. It is possible to improve electrical connectivity in a state in which the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. electrical connection between the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw due to the viscosity of can improve the properties.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the noise that enters the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal pan screw. ), it is possible to stably maintain the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin.

Further, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are separated as described above. , are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness of the applied solder is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder rises), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw will be separated from each other. There is a problem that the contact area is reduced and the electrical connectivity is deteriorated. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 serve as mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) for the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, if the thickness of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, is not made uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform. The contact area between the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. It should be noted that if the thickness of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral Distortion of the control substrate 1510 will occur, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw abuts, is A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510 y of the peripheral control board 1510 , and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, is made uniform as the plate thickness of the metal mask. can be done. In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed into a metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste is applied through the holes, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste. The plate thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have their surfaces are soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed, but the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abuts against the seat surface (seat surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, respectively, and is in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side of 1510x, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. 1510r4 and inserting metal pan head screws into mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 of the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied through the holes formed in the metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) can be flowed into the solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 should be soldered so that the soldering does not partially bulge. need to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is flowed into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width of the resist is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are arranged in a ring around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. and horizontal lines (the resist may have a predetermined width and only vertical lines may be formed in a plurality of lines spaced apart by a predetermined distance, or the resist may have a predetermined width). A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in the horizontal direction with a predetermined distance between them.), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines are formed obliquely downward to the right), and a small circular shape (not shown). An aggregated shape and the like can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). Any material may be used as long as it can exhibit the effect of suppressing the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In the above-described embodiment, a metal pan head screw was used to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a “chrysanthemum washer”).

In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a are formed. are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and a land 1510rb1 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rb4 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan head screw. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. A metal cover 1501′ may be used instead of the resin cover 1501. FIG. In this case, the base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

An amplifier board having circuits for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is accommodated in the metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal board box. Further, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. noise may intrude into the partial case of Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of amplifier boards formed on the amplifier board The land and the mounting surface (boss surface) of a plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the rear surface side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case are brought into contact with each other. , the plurality of lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are brought into contact with each other. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the board box made of metal is in a state of being electrically connected to a plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal part case of the metal board box The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transferred from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case via the metal round head screws, thereby efficiently dissipating the heat to the outside air. can also

In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (flat cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan screws. Thus, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, a plurality of lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and a plurality of lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board. and multiple lands of the sub-board are screwed to both ends of metal struts (spacers), respectively. can be directly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations. However, the board box for housing the power supply board and the various relay board boxes for housing various relay boards are made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. It may be fixed in the same way. In this way, the same noise countermeasure effect as the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be obtained for the board box that houses the power board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500. A board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By arranging it near the center of 552 , it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail 553 has a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed on its lower side (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) to the outside through the metal powder of the game ball B. can be dropped, by arranging the board-to-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the board-to-board connector can be prevented. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inter-board connectors, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. A board-to-board connector by means of a special connector SCN4 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). As shown in FIG. 217, when 1500 is attached, the area above the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it to be long in the vertical direction. The area of adhesion can be minimized. When the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged to be long in the horizontal direction, the upper area of the board-to-board connector becomes large, so that the area on which dust, metallic powder, etc., adheres is greatly increased. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are elongated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. As described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac becomes Even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. there is In order to prevent dust, metallic powder, etc. from adhering to the respective electrical terminals, the direction in which the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged, the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a socket) that serves as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or a socket that serves as a plug). a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, it becomes a special connector (or a plug). special connector).

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or a combination thereof. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover side wall 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, thereby contributing to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. FIG. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side were formed with the ventilation holes 1501az, through the ventilation holes 1501az, Foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

[Other noise countermeasures by peripheral control units]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above. At the same time, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the rear surface side of the cover body 1501 (the flat cover plate 1501a) with metal round head screws. Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates and become the same ground (GND), noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be (hereinafter referred to as "noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which noise countermeasures are taken by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control board box according to second to fifth embodiments 222 to 241, will be described below. In FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as the reference numerals of the various members used in the configuration of the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. A description of the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board boxes according to the second to fifth embodiments will be omitted except for some.

In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is, as described above, all made of conductive polycarbonate containing carbon. In contrast to the configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments for noise countermeasures, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. In addition, in the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box. In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

FIGS. 222 to 226 show the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal shield plate, and this metal shield plate A portion of the shield plate abuts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along line -X, and FIG. 226 is a view along arrow A in FIG.

227 to 230 show the configuration of noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, which further strengthens the noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. 227 shows a structure in which a portion of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of 1510 or the like is exposed and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 is further brought into contact via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 228 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 229 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 230 is a ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board for ensuring good contact between the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. , a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (stripping example (a)) and a schematic diagram of the back surface (soldering surface) of the peripheral control board (stripping example (b)). )), a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes with lands are arranged), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board (land is (d)) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged.

FIGS. 231 to 235 show a configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. The rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate, A part of the metal first shield plate and a part of the metal second shield plate are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. FIG. 232 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a mounting procedure, FIG. 234 is a diagram (a) showing lands formed around through-holes on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and shows a foil extraction area; FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing lands formed around through holes on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment; , and a diagram (c) showing the foil-extracted area. In FIG. 227, the board conductive elastic member 1507 that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing, and in FIG. The contactable conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is indicated by a chain double-dashed line for ease of viewing of the drawing.

FIGS. 236 to 241 show the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are covered with metal shield plates. Of the various boards housed in the peripheral control board box, which are not covered at all, the area where the ground (GND) of a specific board is partially exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are connected via a conductive elastic member. 236 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. (a) shows a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and shows a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen in the same figure. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, in which the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. FIG. 240 is a view (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut off so that the deformed state when pressed against the back cover can be seen, and FIG. 240 is the tip of the contact probe; FIG. 241 is a partially enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening into which a substrate can be inserted and brought into contact, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of taking out the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of a specific board that makes good contact with the elastic member, and is a schematic diagram of the copper foil side on the back side (solder side) of the specific board ( Stripping example (a)), a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (stripping example (b)), a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole with land An example (c) in which a plurality of through-holes are arranged, and a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) in which a plurality of through-holes having lands are arranged).

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; It is provided with a member 1545 and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 and is molded from transparent non-conductive resin. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the inner space of the cover body 1501 together with a metal shield plate 1540, thereby forming a metal shield. A plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. placed like this. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced by the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, the metal shield A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to align with mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In this state, among the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition to the contact state, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are brought into contact with each other. Also, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the ground (GND) lines of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is formed on the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwing them toward mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, A peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . In this state, land 1520rf4 among lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the rear surface of L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of metal shield plate 1540. Also, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. In addition, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the liquid crystal is displayed. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the 1530 ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 and various substrates are clamped and fixed, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are separated by the above-described predetermined distance dimension. A gap (2.3 mm) having a is formed.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between a volume control switch 1510d and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501; and the area of the gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a metal shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Via the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a has an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d on the right side when viewed from the front, corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. A vertically elongated rectangular through-hole 1502ab is formed which is one size larger than the rear surface of 1540d.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A noise-free route is formed.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. L-shaped shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side. Mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

In addition, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (this second embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. In this case, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and at the center of the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and bent backward by a predetermined distance (21 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the second embodiment). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square-shaped opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the fan mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact therewith.

The metal shield plate 1540 is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane, The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel surfaces. In the second embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. The mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. 1501ah1 and 1501ah2. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. This is one mounting boss hole out of a pair of formed mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. These mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and extend from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 as described above. These are two mounting boss holes out of four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 protruding from each other.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (this In the second embodiment, a space having a diameter of 14.8 mm is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), resistor (not shown), capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN3, etc.), and liquid crystal output board 1530 The second space 1505b accommodates various electronic components (resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN4, etc.), while the second space 1505b does not accommodate any electronic components. By accommodating various electronic components and the like susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise). This is because the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing the various electronic components that generate heat. . In other words, the metallic shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540 is formed with ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, respectively. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c applied to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester fabric on which a copper and nickel metal film is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm. has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) whose width is about 2 mm and whose height is about 0.035 mm.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. A state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is reached.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It will be in a state of being clamped and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are dimensional. It can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through-hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state where it covers the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501. Then, a metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. In the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) to the rear surface of the is 2.7 mm.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and into the through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the housing.

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin box (protective cover body 1601 described above). Also, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of a peripheral control board 1510 or the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are arranged to be the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. 1510 or the like and can be the same ground (GND), so that the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530). can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are molded from transparent non-conductive resin. , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metallic shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. The metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates when it is attached and fixed. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 can be blocked from the substrate through the metal shield plate 1540. A “route through which noise escapes” can be formed by leading to the ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing it. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of checking the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 1510, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., direction of the IC, part number , pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. 1510b, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is designed to keep the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the states of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. is also suitable. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. . As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance of and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has luster, and the area of the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. and its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting section capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and directing it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is secured by the cover body 1501 and various boards. A structure is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by sandwiching and fixing. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of each, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540. can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 can be removed by guiding it to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 .

In the second embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed in this space, and a metal shield plate 1540 is placed in this space to form two spaces. These two spaces are a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (in the second embodiment, 12 mm), and a distance dimension of a second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) and a second space 1505b. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production object, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The predetermined height distance dimension may be configured to be greater than the first predetermined height distance dimension. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and the second space 1505b. Efficient transfer of heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating various electronic components and the like that generate heat inside. can be done.

In the second embodiment, a metal shield plate 1540 is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is printed with Visually check the part number and type (or management number), the IC pin status of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide rectangular openings at positions of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN3) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. 1530, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area.

In the second embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation takes in air through the blades and sends the air out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. good too. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

It should be noted that, even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are gathered can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

Also in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, metal pan head screws were used. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. A configuration is employed in which a portion of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the display device 1600 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further abuts via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is pushed backward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae are not formed with any ventilation holes 1540az. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side walls 1540ae are arranged such that their end surfaces extend from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is spaced apart, it does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. At a position corresponding to the region ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed, there is a substrate conductive material that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az having a square shape (a shape in which both the vertical distance dimension and the horizontal distance dimension are about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion openings 1502az are formed to protrude forward and rearward from the base plate 1502a, the front end surfaces of the insertion openings 1502az are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. The rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is formed so as to have a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1.5 mm) from the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates so as not to contact, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is a metal shield plate It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the rear surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of 1540. As shown in FIG.

There are seven regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these, and the peripheral data ROM There is one region ROP where part of the ground (GND) is exposed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this. There are two regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion openings 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these. In other words, a total of 11 regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. , the base plate 1502a is provided with a total of 11 insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. Further, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed near the respective insertion openings 1502az on the back side of the base flat plate 1502a. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the operator of the manufacturer inserts the board conductive elastic member 1507 . As described above, the base body 1502 is molded from transparent non-conductive resin, so that the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. Note that the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive Elastic Member for Board of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are separated. It has a board conductive elastic member 1507 that can be electrically connected. The substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a rectangular foam 1507b as a core covered with the conductive covering portion 1507a. , consists of Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1507b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used.

The board conductive elastic member 1507 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction (when viewed from the right side of the board conductive elastic member 1507 in FIG. 228, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, and the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 has cushioning properties (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is difficult to come off from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partially Exposed Areas of Grounds of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the same structure. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. 230(a) and 230(b), the region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is arranged such that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front surface shape of the board conductive elastic member 1507. A resist solution is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole instead of exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230(c) and 230(d), the area ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed with a land around each through hole. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1510yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the board conductive elastic member 1507 will be described. Before attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the manufacturer's operator Then, the substrate conductive elastic members 1507 are sequentially inserted from the longitudinal direction into the insertion openings 1502az of the base body 1502 described above from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Work is performed to bring the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with the exposed region ROP.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are accommodated in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are connected to the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND).

In addition, a conductive layer for each substrate, one of which is in contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, is in contact. The other end of the elastic member 1507 passes through a corresponding through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is collapsed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm in height), thereby reducing the dimensional tolerance. The board conductive elastic member 1507 can absorb a dimensional deviation due to an assembly error. As a result, the board conductive elastic member 1507 is maintained in a state in which an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction. , and the contact surface with the area ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, the contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, , maintain good electrical connection, and connect the ground (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ( GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected reliably, and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 and the like are electrically connected. can be connected to the same ground (GND). For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 are blocked by the shield plate 1540 made of metal. A “route through which noise escapes” can be formed by leading to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing noise through the substrate conductive elastic member 1507 . As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

It should be noted that in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed, but it abuts on the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan head screw. The mounting surfaces (bosses) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the mounting surface 1510, may be coated with a resist solution and covered. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist solution. be. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screws. state can be In addition, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that contacts the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer coated on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same thickness. 1510r4 and inserting metal pan head screws into mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

In the third embodiment, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation takes in air through the blades and sends the air out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. good too. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Also in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are gathered can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined pattern formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment as well, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal round head screw was used. Peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a by passing metal washers such as flat washers, spring washers, and toothed washers (also called chrysanthemum washers) through the round head screws.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

231 and 232, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the box shape is opened at the rear and is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield placed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 A plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined location on the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board. 1530 and the like, which can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding into various substrates, a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 arranged on the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates; and a base body 1502 made of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 . In the inner space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted on a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back surface. It is sandwiched between (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of cover body 1501. By closing the opening of cover body 1501 with base body 1502, a peripheral control board box formed by cover body 1501 and base body 1502 is formed. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when power is cut off is provided from a holder (not shown). A cylindrical protrusion preventing portion 1501aw is formed to protrude from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power source 1510e so that the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) is not cut off. It is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that In addition, the end face of the jump-out preventing portion 1501aw is arranged apart from the backup power source 1510e by a predetermined distance dimension (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when attaching various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral The rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a is inserted directly into the through-holes (excluding the ones into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. However, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are mounted on the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. 1530 and the like, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted directly into a specific through-hole among the plurality of through-holes in the various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, various peripheral control boards 1510, peripheral data ROM boards 1520, liquid crystal output boards 1530, etc. The through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of the substrate. , and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and other through holes other than the specific through holes in the various substrates, the opening of the cover member 1501 is closed with the base member 1502, and the base flat plate 1502a is formed. Each through-hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) into the through-hole of the mounting boss formed on the front side, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other through-holes in the various boards are inserted into the mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. 2 Perform the fixation method.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through-hole formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. The hole 1540c2a is arranged so as to align with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are the through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned with each other. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to align with the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later, are mounted. 1540b1a is arranged so as to be aligned with mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the rear surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later is are aligned with mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Then, metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into specific through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby performing peripheral control. A substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws.

Among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, specific through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2. As a result, of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan head screw. becomes. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the output board 1530 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . Become.

Then, metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into specific through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and mounting is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. As a result, of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are brought into contact with the bearing surface of the metal pan screw. Become. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metallic shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1540 on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . .

After this first fixing method, in a second fixing method, a metal plate, which will be described later, is applied so as to cover the rear (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to various peripheral control substrates 1510, peripheral data ROM substrates 1520, and liquid crystal output substrates 1530. Among the through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are corresponding through holes. metal pan screws (not shown) in through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a by closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board made of metal, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in this order, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal. It is sandwiched between the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As shown in FIG. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are arranged. , are in contact with each other, and L-shaped attachment of lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. , the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board back surface (solder surface) The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metallic The substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. As a result, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby supplying power. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630 .

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the shield on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate are fixed. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 and the surface of the plate 1555 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the backside (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the same ground is connected. (GND), the metal board rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby connecting to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. , and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 . Become.

Further, by performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in order, the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the shield plate on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal. and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of 1555 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metallic substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by connecting it to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . .

Further, by performing the first fixing method and then the second fixing method in order, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is made of metal. It is pressed against the front surface side of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of the same material and is in a state of being in contact. As a result, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model type are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between a volume control switch 1510d and a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501; and the area of the gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the metal substrate surface (mounting hole) accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the surface (surface) side shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small. It is possible.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
Through holes 1502ag1 are formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1-1502af6 are formed with .about.1502ag6, respectively. Metal round screws (not shown) are inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 to fix the base 1502 to the cover body 1501 .

It should be noted that on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal Board Surface (Mounting Surface) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
It is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal is a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) with a predetermined distance between the upper center left side and the lower center left side of the shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by 12 mm (in the fourth embodiment, from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed.

In addition, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a rectangular shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm), which is oblong when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined distance above and below the right side of the shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, and the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) and bent backward by a predetermined distance above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a). A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from its upper end to its lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square-shaped opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the fan mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a fit into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It will be inserted without contact.

The substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed in parallel with each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. is a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this space, two spaces are formed by disposing a metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), and a second predetermined height distance between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. and a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

In the first space, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power supply generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown), etc.) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN3, etc.), and provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 While various electronic parts and the like (resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated, the second space does not accommodate any electronic parts or the like. By accommodating various electronic components and the like susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Since various electronic components that generate heat are not accommodated, the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is for efficient communication. In other words, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Shield flat plate 1540a of substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal has a plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, and has the same shape. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

In addition, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 receives noise from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). sidewalls 1540ae are formed respectively. These side walls 1540ae are not formed with any ventilation holes 1540az. In addition, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side walls 1540ae are arranged such that their end surfaces extend from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since it has a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and is spaced apart, it does not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

Shield flat plate 1540a of metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which protrusion prevention portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape protruding from the back side of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1502 passes. is formed with an opening 1540aw.

[Metal Board Backside (Solder Side) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
It can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various boards such as peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal board is formed on the upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right sides of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 2.3 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1555a) are formed on the sides. These L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are bent so that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

Notches 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed on the shield flat plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. In addition, the shield flat plate 1555a includes a mounting boss 1502af4 that contacts the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, A notch portion 1555aa5 is formed so as not to interfere with the mounting boss 1502af5 that abuts on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. In addition, on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electrical connections other than the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (adhered) to prevent a short circuit due to physical connection. Further, the side wall 1540ae and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal are not formed in the shield flat plate 1555a at all.

It should be noted that, in the area below the notch 1555aa5 on the surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d formed on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached to the back surface. This is a region where the conductive elastic member 1545 that is attached (adhered) is pressed and contacted.

In a state in which a metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back surface (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, By arranging a metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in the vicinity of the back surface side (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, Various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components, etc., and the absorbed heat is removed from various substrates by the metallic substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, thereby efficiently cooling various substrates. In other words, the substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise).

Note that when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back side of the substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 made of metal is in contact with the surface of the base plate 1502 a of the base body 1502 .

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a conductive covering portion 1545a, a rectangular foam 1545b as a core covered with the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The cross-sectional shape (sliced shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , has a rectangular shape whose height is about 0.035 mm.

[Method for Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached. The through hole 1540c1a formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the upper surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal board 1540 is arranged. The through-hole 1540b2a formed in the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, and 1520r4 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged. 1530r2, 1530r3, 1530r4 are arranged so as to be aligned with mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 233, by the first fixing method, a metal pan (not shown) is directly attached from the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The cover plate 1501a is fixed by inserting screws into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. According to this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates as silk printing for the through holes to be fixed. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan head screws (not shown) for fixing. The color of the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark as silk printing is the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ) are printed in the same color (here, white) as the silk-printed color of the area indicating the position (including direction designation) of various electronic components to be mounted (including direction designation) and the part number.

Specifically, in the through-hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH1 encircling the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a thick solid white line is silk-printed. , and a white serial number 1 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH2 encircling the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back (solder side) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. , a white serial number 2 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2.

Further, in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 encircling the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 3 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 encircling the periphery of the land 1530rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 4 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH5 encircling the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 5 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as a silk print near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5. In the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixation instruction mark DTH6 encircling the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line is printed as silk printing. A white serial number 6 surrounded by a rectangular white line is printed as silk printing near the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6.

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws in metal pan head screws (not shown) from serial number 1 to serial number 4 to fix the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. It may be slightly displaced from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, by fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is eliminated. When fixing the control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover plate 1501a Since the dimensional margins provided for each of them can be absorbed, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted so that the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the cover flat plate 1501a. It can be matched with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side.

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws metal round head screws (not shown) to serial numbers 1 and 2 to form them on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4, which are connected to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 .

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts and screws metal pan head screws (not shown) from serial number 3 to serial number 4, thereby forming on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4, which are attached to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metallic shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

An operator of the manufacturer sequentially inserts metal pan head screws (not shown) into serial numbers 5 and up to serial number 6, and screws them in to fix them. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3, which are attached to each other, and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other.

In addition, when the manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan head screws (not shown) in order from serial number 1 to serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker performs serial number 1 to serial number 6 in order. If a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted and fixed by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) at random instead of inserting and screwing in a metal pan head screw (not shown), any one of serial numbers 1 to 6 In some cases, a mistake may occur in which a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the object indicated by the serial number and screwed in to fix it. If such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with incomplete fixation by metal pan screws (not shown).

In addition, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 designated by serial numbers 1 to 6 by the operator of the manufacturer. Through-holes other than 1510r3, that is, one or more of through-holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through-holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Even if the cover plate 1501a is fixed by inserting a metal round head screw (not shown) directly into the through hole and screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501. , among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan screw and the erroneously inserted metal boss 1502af1 to 1502af6 Since it always interferes with the head of the pan head screw, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501 so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely closed with the base body 1502 .

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the L of a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed so as to cover the back (solder surface) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the letter-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped mounting of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) side of the metal board is performed. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is aligned with the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal substrate. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged to match the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. In this manner, the substrate rear (solder) side shield plate 1555 made of metal is arranged to cover the rear (solder) sides of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since holes such as ventilation holes are not formed at all in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board made of metal, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to The serial number 6 is also covered with a shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal, making it difficult to see. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505, which is molded from transparent non-conductive resin, is viewed from various angles through various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is installed, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method. The shield plate 1555 makes it invisible, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate. is attached (bonded) with an adhesive tape 1545c.

Subsequently, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the guide portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the cover body 1501 The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501, and the mounting bosses formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a are secured by the second fixing method. Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed to fix them.

Specifically, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a to secure the L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal substrate. through-hole 1555b1a formed in the mounting piece 1555b1, the through-hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metallic substrate. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, a metal round screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is mounted. 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. It is fixed by screwing it into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped of the metal board back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It will be in a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are arranged. , are in contact with each other, and L-shaped attachment of lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. In other words, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In this connected state, the shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the rear surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is connected. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal board is formed. The rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, a metal round screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is mounted. The through hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are threaded into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to fix them. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal board rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut against each other. state. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the backside (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a and passed through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the rear side of the cover plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing into the formed mounting boss hole 1501ah4. Also, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a to pass through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and form it on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

Also, a metal round head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to attach the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are passed through and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a for fixing. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal come into contact with each other. state. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the substrate made of metal is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

By this second fixing method, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and screwed in to secure the metal board surface. The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against the surface side of the substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal to be in contact therewith. As a result, the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional tolerances and assembly errors. The conductive elastic member 1545 can absorb the dimensional deviation. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, etc. The periphery sandwiched between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 in a state of being electrically connected to the side shield plate 1555 reliably. The control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of various boards, etc., and can be the same ground (GND). The peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520) provide an environment strong against noise). , and various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Subsequently, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed in the base body 1502. screw in. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected through the wiring drawer opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and into the through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the housing.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by being molded from transparent non-conductive resin, and the internal space of the cover body 1501 is , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530. Board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. , the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is shielded from the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). Through the side shield plate 1555, it can be led to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed in the shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. Arrangement of circular ventilation holes 1540az will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of checking the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the , the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged separately so as to form an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are improved. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the states of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12 V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. is also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are shielded by a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed, and a metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two A space is created. These two spaces are, as described above, between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. a first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the cover flat plate and a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the back surface of 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. there is The interior of the first space thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a glossy surface, and the metal substrate faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. The area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its surroundings serve as a reflecting portion that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. also has the function of These reflecting portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are placed on the board surface (mounting surface) side made of metal, a shield plate 1540, and the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal board. By being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555 and attached, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. A configuration of electrically connecting to the In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line of each, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is transmitted through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data. It can be led to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from the body 1502 is filtered through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates). (GND)) and removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and metal substrates. In a state in which the cover plate 1501a is sandwiched by the rear (solder surface) side shield plates 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a, the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the cover plate 1501a are in contact with each other. A space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the substrate and the rear surface, and a metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is placed in this space. are arranged, two spaces are formed, and these two spaces are the surfaces of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal. and a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a game board 5 is provided with a large production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position), If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The predetermined height distance dimension may be configured to be greater than the first predetermined height distance dimension. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space. By not accommodating various electronic components that generate heat, the heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space through the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can tell you well.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a control panel. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.) ) can be visually recognized, and the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed information on the peripheral control board 1510 can be seen. The contents (for example, orientation of the IC, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ), the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). However, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It can also be configured as In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the shape formed by the special connector SCN3. The shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) is changed so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area.

[Circumference of Through Holes of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Here, the surroundings of through holes formed in various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 are formed in contact with and electrically connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. ) side shield plate 1540 has a land 1520rf4 which is electrically connected to the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. Also, as shown in FIG. A land 1530rf1 is formed in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 to be electrically connected.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1 are electrically connected to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a "noise exit route" is formed through which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 made of metal flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). The surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, and 1501am1 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a to L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a is formed. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed in the foil extraction areas NR5 and NR6 having the shape of a circle that is one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3. , NR6. In addition, as shown in FIG. Foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9 are formed in the shape of circles that are one size larger than the outline circles of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, and 1501ah4 formed on the back side, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, and 1501ah4 are mounted. The faces (boss faces) abut on the foil extraction regions NR7, NR8 and NR9, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a is provided. Foil removal areas NR10, NR11, and NR12 having the shape of a circle one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed in the mounting surfaces ( (boss surface) abut on the foil extraction regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

These foil-extracted regions NR5 to NR12 are designed to prevent noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from entering through mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is isolated from the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so that In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover plate 1501a through the foil extraction areas NR5 to NR12, thereby causing peripheral control. A “noise-removable route” is formed that prevents intrusion into solid grounds of various substrates such as the substrate 1510 , the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 , and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 are formed in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 . In addition, as shown in FIG. ) side shield plate 1555 has a land 1520rb2 which is electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(a), on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a metallic substrate rear surface (solder surface) side is provided. A land 1530rb3 is formed in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555. As shown in FIG.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2 and 1530rb3 are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3 and 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the backside (solder surface) side of the board made of metal. Therefore, a "noise exit route" is formed through which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board made of metal flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are attached to mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af3, and 1502af3 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 come into contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a 1502AF1, 1502AF2, 1502AF3, 1502AF6, and the back of the metal board (soldering surface) side (soldering surface) side (soldering surface) L -shaped mounting 1555 L -shaped mounting 1555 Even if it enters 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 and lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, this intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(b), on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there are metal pan head screws (not shown). Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 to be directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(b), metal pans (not shown) are provided on the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 surrounding the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing. On the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as shown in FIG. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 to be directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounding the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with thick white solid lines are printed as silk printing.

Even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and screwed in, the area of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 does not Although the regions near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the regions indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing indication marks DTH5 and DTH6 are not shown. By forming the head of the screw to be larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH5 and DTH6 makes the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is designed to contribute to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which a pan head screw is inserted, screwed in, and then forgotten to be fixed. Also, even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed in, the region of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 will not be covered. Of these, the regions near the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), but the outer peripheral portions of the regions indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 are not shown. Since the head of the pan head screw (not shown) is formed to be larger than the outline of the head of the pan head screw, the solid white line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 makes the head of the pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is possible to contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting and screwing in a pan head screw and forgetting to fix it. Also, even if metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed in, the area of the thick white solid line portion of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 will not be removed. Although the regions near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlap with the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the regions indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 are not shown. By forming the head of the screw to be larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white solid line of the screw fixing indication marks DTH3 and DTH4 makes the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) stand out. It is designed to contribute to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) in which a pan head screw is inserted, screwed in, and then forgotten to be fixed.

235(c), a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. A foil extraction area NR13 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the attachment surface (boss surface) of the attachment boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil extraction area NR13. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(c), on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a base flat plate 1502a is provided. A foil extraction region NR14 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil extraction region NR14.

These foil-extracted regions NR13 and NR14 serve as grounds (GND) for various substrates so as to prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a to the solid ground of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the foil extraction regions NR13 and NR14. A "noise-proof route" that cannot be penetrated is formed.

In this way, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are printed with the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by thick white solid lines as silk printing. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes into which metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501. FIG. On the other hand, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 on which the screw fixing instruction mark is not printed at all as silk printing, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by screwing, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501. It is a through-hole that is clamped and fixed by fastening together with mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of 1501a.

That is, metal round head screws are directly inserted into a plurality of through-holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501. If the through-holes and the through-holes that are clamped and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are mixed, an operator of the manufacturer may apply silk to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 as silk printing, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed on the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 and through holes 1520r1 and 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing metal round screws. 1520r4, through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through-holes 1510r1 of the peripheral control substrate 1510 which are through-holes which are sandwiched and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, 1510r4, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be distinguished. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are screwed (fixed by screwing). work) can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of working efficiency.

In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield Either one or both of the plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are electrically floating. The electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are shown. In addition to the case of electrical connection by wiring that is not shown, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 described above may be electrically connected by wiring that is not shown. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 300 to impart rigidity. It is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

In the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the shield plate 1555 on the rear side (solder side) of the metal substrate is the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When placed so as to cover the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the above, as described above, the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 made of metal has holes such as ventilation holes. Since they are not formed at all, the screw fixing indication marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered with the metal substrate backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555, making them difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 . In this way, an operator of the manufacturer can determine whether or not various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method through the plurality of holes (that is, It is possible to visually confirm whether or not the metal pan screws are inserted and fixed in the portions where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are present.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, The land 1510rb2, 1510rb3 into which the metal pan head screw (not shown) shown in 235(b) is directly inserted and screwed is surrounded by thick white solid lines, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 are printed as silk printing, On the rear surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, metal pan screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Screw fixation indication marks DTH1 and DTH2 are printed by silk printing to enclose the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be directly inserted and screwed in, respectively, by thick white solid lines. On the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 into which metal pan head screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Although the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by solid lines are printed as silk printing, they may be replaced with thick white dashed lines (one-dot chain line, two-dot chain line) instead of the thick white solid lines.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are silk-printed are the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including orientation designation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the part number are printed as silk prints. Although it is the same color (white) as the printed color, the area indicating the position (including direction designation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and its part number may be a color different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, if the area that indicates the position (including direction designation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and the part number is printed in white , the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be silk-printed in yellow or black so that the colors are different from white.

Further, in the configuration for noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal board surface (mounting surface) The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the metal substrate surface are in contact with each other. The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the metal substrate. The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2. The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal substrate is not brought into contact with the land 1520rf4, and the L-shaped shield plate 1540 on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate is configured to abut on the surface of the shield plate 1555. The rear surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 is not brought into contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but is brought into contact with the surface of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. can be configured to This is a state in which the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-described conductive elastic member 1545 . This is because

In this configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is configured so as not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In addition, through-holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) shield plate 1540 are formed on the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a. The base body 1502 also corresponds to through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Through-holes are formed at the respective positions. Through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540b1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1, 1540b1 Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 come into contact with each other. state (that is, a state in which good electrical connectivity can be achieved between the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (soldering surface) side shield plate 1555). Screw holes are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so that they are clamped and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 . It can be fixed by screwing in each direction.

In the fourth embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out to the outside, the air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 on the substrate surface (mounting surface) side made of metal. However, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation draws in air through the blades toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. air may be forced out. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Also, in the noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. For the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. A squeegee (something like a spatula) is used to spread the solder paste on the metal mask so that it is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask. , the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the surface (mounting surface) side of the metal substrate are in contact. In order not to reduce the contact area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is designed so that the soldering does not partially bulge. should be uniform to

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by partially applying a resist solution to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are gathered can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to the area having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist solution can be reduced. 1510rf1, 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that such a predetermined figure formed by resist may be applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison of noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and noise countermeasure configuration by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates to become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the cover body 1501 molded of transparent non-conductive resin and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material covering the opening of the cover body 1501. and a base body 1502 molded from a flexible resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

In the noise countermeasure configuration of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, T In that the board conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted on the back side of the base flat plate 1502 a so that a part of the board conductive elastic member 1508 having a letter shape protrudes from the back side of the base body 1502 , the liquid crystal output board 1530 A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed is provided on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the test pad for the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 , and that the cover body 1501 has openings for contacting probes with the test pads. is different from the configuration of

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fifth embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is mostly similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. At a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a board conductive elastic member 1508 that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted. A rib portion 1502aw is formed to protrude forward from the surface of the base flat plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not come into contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square shape (one side is 8 mm) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw. The T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1508a and a T-shaped core member covered by the conductive covering portion 1508a. and a foam 1508b having a Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1508b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. The T-shaped foaming body 15808b has a rectangular parallelepiped base portion that is long in the vertical direction (when the T-shaped foaming body 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about 8 mm and a height of about 16 mm), and the projection has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that extends in the front-rear direction from the center to the rear (when the T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237 is viewed from the right side, the width is about 11 mm). 5 mm, about 8 mm deep and about 8 mm high). After the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the board conductive elastic member 1508 is assembled (the method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted). ), the rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base member 1502 and pushed in the vertical direction to fit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238(a), a protruding portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction of the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 protrudes rearward from the back side of the base flat plate 1502a. state.

When the vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the T-shaped substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, as shown in FIG. ), the front surface of the base portion, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction, is pressed against the region ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and is brought into contact. The upper and lower back sides of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction (that is, the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction to which the projecting portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction is not connected) ) are engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

In this manner, the board conductive elastic member 1508 is formed in a T-shape, and the rib portion 1502aw on the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 and the insertion opening 1502az are formed in the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. With this configuration, when the board conductive elastic member 1508 is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az and pushed in, as described above, the rectangular parallelepiped base portion of the board conductive elastic member 1508 elongated in the vertical direction is formed. The upper back side and the lower back side (that is, the back side of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction to which the projecting portion having the rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction is not connected) are engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Since it is in the closed state, the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 can be made difficult to come off from the insertion port 1502az, and is easy to handle.

It should be noted that on the back surface (solder surface) side of peripheral control board 1510, areas corresponding to disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 have a smaller outer shape than disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 having large circumferences are formed, respectively, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil extraction regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-extracted regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground of peripheral control board 1510 ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil extraction regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A noise-free route is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are accommodated in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of the picture frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the picture frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the board conductive elastic member 1508 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 is a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the front-rear direction. is pressed against the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 (in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the front-rear direction of the board conductive elastic member 1508 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and expands in the vertical direction), and the T-shaped board conductive elastic member 1508 is deformed into an H-shape. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. , to maintain good electrical connection, the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, are electrically reliably connected, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520) and can be the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the board conductive elastic member 1508 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it is electrically connected to the line and can be the same ground (GND), the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 and various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530) and the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are molded from transparent non-conductive resin. , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions. When the shaped base portion is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 via the board conductive elastic member 1508). is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM board 1520). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. For this reason, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to the substrate ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and removed. A "route to exit" can be formed. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), and the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) can be reduced. can contribute.

The ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ( ) (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ( ) is connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of ) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As shown in FIG. 240, on the cover body 1501, the tips of contact probes (hereinafter simply referred to as "contact probes") are attached to the test pads (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It may be a "test lead" for conducting a continuity check of a so-called "tester." By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected. An inspector can easily perform an inspection operation to determine whether or not there is connection.

[Partially Exposed Areas of Grounds of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed will be described. A region ROP formed in part of the ground (GND) on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as shown in FIGS. A portion of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of 1530y has a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 and has a shape larger than the front surface shape of the base portion. Resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be exposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

It is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole instead of exposing the solid ground as the region ROP. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241(c) and 241(d), a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the front surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, and the copper foil surface 1530yp of the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed with a land around each through hole. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

In the fifth embodiment, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to flow into the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By blowing out air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the outside, when taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of air vents. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be kept small. Air may be sucked in through the peripheral control IC 1510a and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover member 1501 and the base member 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

It should be noted that, even in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 abuts on the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee (like a spatula) is placed on the metal mask. The solder paste is applied from the holes formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a tool), and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flown into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In order not to reduce the area and deteriorate the electrical connectivity, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, should be soldered so that it does not partially bulge. need to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr is formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist solution. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to areas of a copper foil having a predetermined shape. Specifically, as the “predetermined shape”, the resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 221(a). A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are concentrically formed (a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is concentrically formed in the resist may be used). As shown in FIG. A plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in a chrysanthemum shape around the center of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. A shape formed in a grid pattern composed of directional lines and horizontal lines (the resist may have a shape in which a plurality of vertical lines having a predetermined width are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance, or a shape in which the resist is A shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width only in the lateral direction are formed at intervals of a predetermined distance), as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines rising to the right are formed obliquely (a shape in which lines having a predetermined width of the resist are separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines falling to the right are formed obliquely), although not shown in the figure. A shape in which small circular shapes are gathered can be mentioned.

In this way, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape is formed by coating part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with the resist solution. Since soldering is made to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is It is possible to suppress the amount of solder that is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 as the predetermined shape coated with the resist liquid). 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is not soldered. It can be applied evenly so that it does not swell in one part. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 is covered so as to be electrically connectable.

It should be noted that a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that abuts the bearing surface (the bearing surface of the head) of the pan portion of the metal pan head screw. It may also be performed on the copper foil, which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to Also, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flown into a solder bath for soldering, the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with a resist solution. The thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform by covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment as well, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal round head screw was used. A metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also called a chrysanthemum washer) may be passed through the round head screw to fix the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In addition, in the configuration for noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover. and the metal back cover are housed in a transparent synthetic resin box in a state of being electrically connected, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be molded integrally with this transparent synthetic resin box.

By the way, conventionally, boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profit, a sub-control board for controlling effects executed with the progress of a game, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. is arranged on the back side (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the game machine described in this document, since the game machines are arranged in a row facing each other in a hall, the influence of the noise generated from the game machines facing each other is affected by the board on which the electronic components are mounted. There was a risk that the board would malfunction due to the noise.

In addition, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board, etc., on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity when they rub against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from

Further, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with boards on which electronic components such as ROMs for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and CPUs for controlling display devices for displaying various images are mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some of the various boards provided in the game machine are accommodated in the board box, it is necessary to perform work for accommodating the boards in the board box, and improvement in work efficiency has been demanded.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable]
Next, the flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the performance display device, and the flexible flat cable is a liquid crystal display device. It is a view (b) showing a state electrically connected to the connector of the output board, and is a partially enlarged view of the B section shown in (a) and the C section shown in (b), in which the flexible flat cable is FIG. 244 shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device and is not normally connected to the connector; FIG. FIG. 4A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not normally electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output substrate; FIG. In FIG. 243(c), the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243(b) is shown rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600. In addition, these flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and compared to ordinary round electric wiring, the thickness (diameter) of ordinary round electric wiring is 1/3 to 5 As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba are provided on the upper end side of the main body LFCa, which is elongated in the vertical direction and has a predetermined width, on the back side of the main body LFCa. To reinforce the electrodes LFCba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba that are exposed and have a length and that have a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and that are exposed. While the reinforcing plate LFCca is formed on the main body LFCa, on the lower end side of the main body LFCa, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body LFCa with a predetermined length. A reinforcement plate LFCcb having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is formed on the surface side of LFCa for reinforcing the electrodes LFCbb.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca (see FIG. 243) of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. (a).), while a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the .

The flexible flat cable LFC is bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined vertical distance from the upper end of the main body LFCa, and has a straight upwardly bent portion LFCd (the predetermined vertical distance is It is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.), and a predetermined distance dimension in the horizontal direction (in this embodiment, a predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction) from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right). ), a bent portion LFCe is formed which is smoothly bent in the front direction and smoothly bent in the right direction as it is, and is formed so as to be parallel in the front-back direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the effect display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, as shown in FIG. is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca of the . The control board 1600c restores the drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and includes various electronic components for displaying images on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and LEDs ( Alternatively, various electronic parts for adjusting the brightness of the cold cathode tube are mounted.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is not properly inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba A contact failure may occur between the electrodes LFCba of the connector 1600ca and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 1600ca. one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is obliquely inserted into the connector 1600ca electrode corresponding to this one electrode LFCba, another electrode adjacent to this electrode, , the control board 1600c and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c may be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. In the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side near the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for insertion. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the vicinity of the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the right outer side). These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped on the metal back cover 1600b in the process of pressing with a pressing machine.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After being inserted, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off from the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off. In order to prevent the electrode LFCba of the flat conductor and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba from being obliquely displaced and coming into contact with other adjacent electrodes to prevent a short circuit, the flexible flat cable LFC is provided with a metal backing. Square brackets (") are provided slightly outward from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC as an area where the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction and fixed to the back side of the lid 1600b is attached. These four bracket (")-shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, G2 are stamped in the process of pressing the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by fixing the flexible flat cable LFC to the back side of the metal back cover 1600b with the fixing seal SFC.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 also has the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above and a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 and the like. By inserting and electrically connecting the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device can be displayed from the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Rendering data of an image to be rendered on the apparatus is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is transmitted from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the flexible flat cable. Input is made to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. FIG.

Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector CN10, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb A contact failure may occur between the electrodes LFCbb of the connector CN10 and the corresponding electrodes of the connector CN10. one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is obliquely inserted into the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, another electrode adjacent to this electrode, , the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and various electronic components mounted on the peripheral control substrate 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) so as to serve as a mark for and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), a long solid guideline G3L linearly extending in the horizontal direction is printed by silk printing.

In this embodiment, no through-hole is formed in the area where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. Even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the exposed flexible flat cable LFC is flat. This is to prevent the die conductor from shorting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, The electrode LFCba of the type conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, while the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the electrodes LFCba of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC extend normally to the depths of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the amount of pushing is insufficient, the lower end side peripheral portion of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

Further, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb of the connector CN10 faces the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, while the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that unless the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, that is, the pushing amount is insufficient, the peripheral portion of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[When the flexible flat cable is not properly connected]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600. 244(a), the left end side of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the right end side of the main body LFCa is The guideline G1R linearly extending in the vertical direction is inclined, and the lower edge side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower edge side of the connector 1600ba. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, by the guide lines G1L and G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covered is properly inserted to the depth can be easily determined visually. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator can attach a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the , it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode LFCba is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

In addition, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but obliquely. 244(b), the upper edge of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa extends in the left-right direction. The left end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb) is aligned with the left end of the connector CN10. The side (in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the connector CN10) is inclined, and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. In this way, by the guide lines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted all the way into the provided connector CN10 can be easily visually determined. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 provided in the connector CN10, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the top of the position corresponding to the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper outer side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) was printed by silk-screen printing, and the rectangular area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side was solidly printed by silk-screen printing. may be Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 does not. The copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is prevented from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where 1530x is solidly applied. In addition, short-circuiting of the flat conductors of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) was printed by silk-screen printing, but the liquid crystal corresponding to the rectangular area with the guideline G3U as the upper side and the guideline G3L as the lower side and the area inside the area. A foil extraction area may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed by rubbing the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 does not. Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable LFC will be shorted. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) were printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 was removed. The guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by removing the guide lines G3U and G3L. G3U and G3L may be formed.

In the above-described embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are separated from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are removed. In order to prevent the electrode LFCbb of the type conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb from being obliquely displaced and making contact with another adjacent electrode, a short circuit may occur. A fixing seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction may be attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as the area where the fixing sticker is to be pasted, the area slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixing sticker is indicated by, for example, brackets ("). The guidelines may be formed by silk printing (graphics such as lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed, respectively, or may be formed in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By removing the copper foil, a bracket (“) shape (graphics such as lines and symbols may be used) guide lines may be formed. When applying the liquid, by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the area, a bracket (")-shaped guideline (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed. The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By being fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the flexible flat cable LFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in the case where a substrate is provided on a movable body that is driven by an electric drive voltage, a flexible flat cable is used as an electrical wiring for electrically connecting between the substrate and the drive substrate. good too. Since a load is applied to the movable body due to the electric wiring accompanying the operation of the movable body, this load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of wiring and harnesses as electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the flexible flat cable accompanying the movement of the movable body is suppressed, thereby reducing the overload of the electric drive source. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) are printed by silk-screen printing, a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer. When the formed electrodes LFCbb of flat conductors are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it is visually checked whether the electrodes LFCbb are properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10. However, for example, as an indication of the standby position (original position) of the movable body operated by the drive of the electric drive power, on the substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body A figure such as a line or a symbol indicating the standby position (original position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when an attendant such as a store clerk of a game hall inspects the pachinko machine, the movable body is manually moved to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. can be In addition, even when the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether the movable body is displaced from the standby position (original position), so it can be used to check for defects in the movable body. can also

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side (that is, the upper side of the upper side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the upper side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the lower side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC A long solid line guideline G3L linearly extending in the left-right direction near the bottom of the position corresponding to (that is, the bottom and outside of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. However, the solid line may be replaced with a dashed line, a dashed line with two dots, or an arrow line indicating the direction of insertion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the right inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC), and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, the left inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is the effect display device 1600. may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but near the bottom of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat A long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC (lower inside), and the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC ( That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 may be formed with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper inner side of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the vertical direction. The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly to the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1L linearly extending vertically at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC, and a long solid line guideline G1R linearly extending vertically at a position corresponding to the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. That is, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap each other, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vicinity of the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and outer sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. and a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly to and near the bottom of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the horizontal direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid-line guideline G3U and a long solid-line guideline G3L linearly extending in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. That is, the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlapped, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L are aligned in the front-rear direction. positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. In addition, when the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the dimension of the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCba normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca. , the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) at which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side are normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca When the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca does not coincide with the lower edge of the connector 1600ca in the front-rear direction and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca is spaced parallel to the lower edge of the connector 1600ca, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca Whether or not the electrode LFCba is normally inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca is determined by checking the bottom edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the bottom edge of the connector 1600ca. It is difficult to use and distinguish. Similarly, the distance dimension between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCbb was normally inserted all the way into the connector CN10, but the upper edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted deep into the connector CN10. In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are normally inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, do not coincide in the front-rear direction, and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is spaced parallel to the lower edge of the connector CN10, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, are spaced apart, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10 by using the lower edge side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge side of the connector CN10. .

Therefore, in such a case, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted deep into the connector 1600ca, , a solid line ( Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be L-shaped integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above.) and the right vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC A solid line extending straight to the right in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC) (in place of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed two-dotted line may be used, and the reinforcing plate LFCca The guideline G1R' (this guideline G1R' may intersect with the guideline G1R described above, or may be an L-shaped guideline integrally formed with the guideline G1R described above). ) and are preferably engraved on the back side of the metal back cover 1600 b of the effect display device 1600 .

Further, in a state in which the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted deep into the connector CN10, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the flexible flat cable A solid line (in place of the solid line , a one-dot chain line, a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. Alternatively, it may be an L-shape formed integrally with the guideline G3U described above.In addition, a rectangular shape ( The inside thereof may be solidly printed by silk printing.) and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A solid line extending linearly downward (in place of the solid line, a dashed line or a two-dotted line may be used in place of the solid line, indicating the position of the bottom side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The guideline G3L' (This guideline G3L' may intersect with the above-described guideline G3L, or may be an L-shaped integrally formed with the above-described guideline G3L. Further, A rectangular shape (the inside of which may be solidly printed by silk printing) having the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L′ and the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the above-described guideline G3L. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is printed by silk printing.

Instead of silk printing, the guidelines G3U' and G3L' can be obtained by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as in the modification described above. Alternatively, guide lines G3U′ and G3L′ can be formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. may Further, as in the above-described modification, the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L' and the guideline G3L described above are removed. By forming a rectangular shape (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may also be removed) having a distance dimension in the left-right direction of may

[Connector connection method]
Next, connect to the connector provided on the relay board that relays various wiring to the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board that relays various wiring to the main control board 1310, and the relay board that relays various wiring to the payout control board 633 Connectors for wiring and harnesses to be connected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the layout of the connectors of the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which the connectors of the wires and harnesses are normally connected to the connectors of the relay board. It is a figure (c) which shows the state to which the connector of wiring and harness is not normally connected with respect to.

By the way, if the connector of the wiring or harness is not properly inserted into the connector of the relay board, contact failure may occur between the electrodes of the connector. When the connector is inserted into the connector, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other, causing a short circuit, which may damage the relay board and various electronic components mounted on various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245(a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD is provided with the socket-side connector SCK into which the plug-side connector PLG of the wiring and harness KDCBL is inserted. there is The connector SCK on the socket side is of a right angle type (also called a "side type"), and is box-shaped with an opening SCKb formed on the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. is formed in A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa, in which the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the lower side surface SCKaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dw1 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD and is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. KDx, but in this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG.

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is inserted into the socket-side connector. It abuts on the lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed, resulting in a state of surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245(b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG The lower side surface PLGb of PLGb) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap in the front-rear direction.

Thus, the connector SCK on the socket side is arranged with a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board edge of the relay board KD) extend in the front-rear direction. are arranged in a positional relationship that overlaps with each other. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, when the operator normally inserts the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the operator's finger The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG), and the lower end side of the relay board KD By touching KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) and being arranged on the same plane, the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is moved to the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted all the way to the back. Also, when the pachinko machine is inspected by an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall, the above-described pachinko machine can be placed on the same plane as described above. By the tactile sensation of being placed, it can be easily determined whether or not the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

Note that when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is obliquely inserted, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the plug side (that is, the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , board end of the relay board KD) with a protrusion amount dSP. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a staff member such as a game hall clerk who inspects the pachinko machine can see that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is not at the lower end of the relay board KD by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, , the lower side surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side, and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched to form a step. It can be easily determined that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted deep into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the socket-side connector SCK has a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. and formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG in a state in which the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board edge of the relay board KD) Although they were arranged in a positional relationship that coincides with the direction and overlaps, the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is printed by silk printing with a solid line that is larger than the outer shape of the connector SCK on the socket side. In addition, in a state in which the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. may be FIG. 246 is a modified example of FIG. 245, and is a view (a) showing the arrangement of the connector of the relay board and the part arrangement line, and the connector of the wiring and harness is normally connected to the connector of the relay board. It is a diagram (b) showing a state, and a diagram (c) showing a state in which the connector of the wiring or harness is not normally connected to the connector of the relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246(a), a socket-side connector SCK into which the plug-side connector PLG of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape with an opening SCKb formed in the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. which is approximately twice the distance dimension dw1 arranged from the lower end side KDeg of KD and has a distance dimension of at least 5 mm, and the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD. are placed in

The reason why the lower side surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is separated from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be explained briefly. When mounting components or passing the board into the solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called "scrap board" (the area where electronic components cannot be mounted), which is 3 mm to 5 mm inward from each edge of the board. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (range from each edge of the board to its periphery). When mounting electronic components without forming this scrap board (that is, when mounting electronic components in the range from each edge of the board to its periphery), a gripping jig for fixing the board and a board warp prevention are required. Although it is necessary to use a jig, in this case as well, electronic components cannot be placed in the area of the substrate clamped by the gripping jig or the substrate warp prevention jig, which is about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower edge side KDeg of the relay board KD, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. It is about twice the distance dimension that is arranged as a square and has at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is inserted. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower edge side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, so that it is arranged inside the relay substrate KD. It will be done.

Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component positions of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed on at least the lower surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and the socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. Around the connector SCK on the socket side, as described above, the rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed. and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with the second distance dimension dw3. In this embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is the distance dimension in which the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. They have the same distance dimension (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa is inserted into the socket-side connector. It contacts with the lower surface SCKaa of the opening SCKb of the SCK and comes into surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG The lower side surface of PLGb (PLGbb) and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are aligned with each other. As a result, workers on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer and staff members such as game hall clerks who inspect pachinko machines can insert the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG into the opening portion SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It can be easily visually determined whether or not it is normally inserted all the way to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

Note that when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is obliquely inserted, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb integrally formed with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component arrangement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is arranged to protrude from the lower side of the DSLK with a protruding amount dSP. As a result, workers on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer and staff members such as pachinko machine shop clerks who inspect the pachinko machine will notice that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is not aligned with the part arrangement line DSLK by the protrusion amount dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it is possible to easily visually determine whether the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted deep into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

By the way, conventionally, various types of control boards such as a main control board for controlling game progress and game profits, a sub-control board for controlling effects to be executed as the game progresses, and an image control board for controlling the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Some of the connectors provided on the circuit board have wires to which wires are inserted and removed, and some have connectors whose one end is electrically connected to the wires. In the connection work, it was necessary to check the electrical connection to the connector, which took time.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and viewed from the front side, the left rear surface of the game board 5 has a payout machine spaced apart by a predetermined distance, as described above. A back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is arranged on the upper left back surface of the game board 5, and is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e on the center side of the left back surface of the game board 5. A payout device 580 is arranged, and an upper full ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e is arranged on the lower side of the left rear surface of the game board 5.

As described above, in this embodiment, the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate 551e are arranged with a predetermined distance from the rear of the left back surface of the game board 5. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded of non-conductive transparent resin covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600 are provided. The formed L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a are arranged along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring treatment pieces 1601a.

The game balls B are ground in the island facilities of the game hall, rub against each other in circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, payout device 580, and upper full ball path unit 600 that can retain the game balls B are attached. .

That is, since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 The formed space (hereinafter referred to as “wiring routing space”) is under an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. As shown in FIG.

Further, various electric wires routed in the wiring space include, for example, wiring for transmitting control signals and wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various electric wires are intermingled in the wiring space. Wiring that transmits control signals is vulnerable to noise and can cause problems due to electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled, or signals that are not originally output are being output. signal, etc.) are likely to be affected by electromagnetic noise.

Then, among the various types of wiring routed in the wiring route space, it is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid problems due to electromagnetic noise for the wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise. On the other hand, there is no need to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise for wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

247 to 252, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as "wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments") will be described. do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view (a) of the game board as seen from the rear for explaining the area where the wiring grooves are attached, and a diagram (b) showing a state in which the wiring grooves according to the first embodiment are mounted on the back side of the game board. FIG. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is a diagram according to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from behind with the wiring grooves attached to the back side of the game board, and FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from the front in a state where it is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 251 is a wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind in a state in which the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment are mounted on the back side of the game board; 1 is a perspective view showing the state of various wiring when the game board is viewed from the front. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 247(b) and 248(c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed in the first and second wiring grooves for electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings. . Also, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for ease of viewing.

[Areas where wiring grooves are installed]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and viewed from the front side, the left back plate is arranged at a predetermined distance from the rear of the left rear surface of the game board 5 . A space is formed between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back left portion 551e by the portion 551e. In this space, various wires are engaged with an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600. 1601 are arranged along the vertical direction. In the wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247(a), instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed in the protective cover body 1601, mounting boss holes are formed in the protective cover body 1601. 1601d are formed two on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring grooves according to the first embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 247(b), 249 and 250, the wiring grooves according to the first embodiment are metal wiring grooves 1605 having conductivity, and are thin metal flat plates (thickness 2 .0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides by bending by press working. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower left side walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Notches 1605c are formed in corresponding portions. A notch hole 1605bb is formed by pressing at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is connected to the same ground (GND ). This prevents the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5 . In other words, electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. .

Notch holes 1605bb formed in mounting surfaces 1605ba of four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in protective cover body 1601, respectively. After the mounting boss holes 1601d are inserted into the notch holes 1605bb (the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss holes 1601d is the same dimension as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch holes 1605bb.) When a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. An extra-groove space is formed with the bottom outer surface 1605d. Further, when the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being closed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an intra-groove space is formed in the metal wiring groove 1605 in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section.

In other words, the space between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the delivery base 551 of the delivery base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 so that the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 are formed. A space outside the groove and a space inside the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed respectively. It's becoming That is, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the side of the electromagnetic noise source. On the other hand, the space inside the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space facing the source side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, the electromagnetic noise is removed from the groove inner space. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the outer space.

As a result, it is possible to avoid problems caused by electromagnetic noise by routing the wiring for transmitting control signals, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and to reduce the influence of electromagnetic noise. Wiring for supplying various power sources that are difficult to receive can be drawn around in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 .

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1606 (abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged parallel to each other and covered with an insulator. It is an important wiring that transmits drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) In order to prevent troubles such as disturbance of the wiring and images like a sandstorm, the wiring is routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 . In addition, various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, a twisted pair cable for transmitting control signals by the plus side wiring and the minus side wiring, the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings that transmit detection signals from various sensors that are input to 1510 are conductors (single wire material or stranded wire material) that are covered with an insulating material. The normal data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is received (input) at the output destination as garbled data, or it is output as a signal that is being output even though it is a signal that is not originally output. In order to prevent troubles such as receiving (inputting) earlier or detection signals from various sensors being accurately received (inputted) to the peripheral control board 1510 , the wiring is drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 . is turned. Twisted pair cables and various types of wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

On the other hand, wiring for supplying various power sources such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V (which may also include ground (GND)) created on the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (single wire or twisted wire). is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state, so compared to the control signal, electromagnetic noise Even if it is affected by the influence of , the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is extremely weak and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the drawer connector (concave type) on the side of the main frame to the drawer connector (convex type) on the side of the game board 5 via the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 . 5 and various wirings for supplying power from the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 to the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 so that they are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through the cutouts 1605c formed on the lower sides of the right and left side walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. It is drawn around in the space inside the groove, and is drawn around upward along the inside of the groove and is drawn around from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various substrates provided on the game board 5 .

In this way, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 provides a space for wiring (a space for wiring) to be a space outside the groove for wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise, and a space outside the groove for wiring that transmits control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story structure divided into a space in the groove for routing wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected, the front surface of the left part of the back plate 551e described above and the game board 5 It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space (wiring routing space) formed on the left rear surface.

Now, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. The flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub performance display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has a thickness (diameter) about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire, and the liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 It is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub performance display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and has a predetermined width. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a on the left upper end side of the main body 1606a elongated in the direction. A reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrodes 1606ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba which are exposed and have a thickness, whereas the lower end of the main body 1606a is formed. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a, and a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined thickness are arranged on the front side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the conductor electrode 1606bb.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are made of a metal backing (not shown) covering the back upper side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the power supply line and substrate ground (GND) of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. A decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a bypass capacitor (not shown) for a power source are mounted between the capacitors, which are called bypass capacitors. are improving their sexuality.

A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the display area and the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, the wires are routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and are guided downward along the space outside the groove. It is drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to the connector of the control substrate provided on the metal back cover covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub-effect display device (not shown). be done.

A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is used to display effects on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5, as described above. It can be routed to an extra-groove space formed by a conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 has a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-like metal frame. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is provided between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the region through which it passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), but instead of or together with this, an L-shaped connection piece is pressed toward the protective cover body 1601 at the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity. By providing a connecting piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connecting surface of this L-shaped connecting piece can be inserted into the protective cover body 1601 through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in a state of being electrically connected by abutting with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, or a connection provided in the protective cover body 1601 by attaching a conductive elastic member to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece. Through the one opening, the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece) in the protective cover body 1601 come into contact with each other. (In other words, the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece passes through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover 1601 and the metallic effect display device 1600 inside the protective cover 1601 is connected. It may be electrically connected to the back cover via a conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating, a rectangular foam as a core covered with the conductive coating, and affixed to the conductive coating. and a conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of foams include heat-resistant polyurethane foams. As the conductive adhesive tape, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating to the connecting surface of the L-shaped connecting piece.

In addition, wiring for transmitting control signals output from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the game board 5 when viewed from the front is provided outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be routed into the space and routed upward along the space outside the groove. In this way, the wiring to the function display unit 1400 can be improved in noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

In addition, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), but even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5, it functions as an antenna that picks up noise and acts as a noise source. If there is no risk of becoming a problem, or if the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is negligibly small, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). , may be in an electrically floating state.

The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate elongated in the vertical direction. ' can be configured as In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605', and the conductive plated portion is is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided on the game board 5 . Even with this configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605′ plated with conductive material has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, reduces electromagnetic noise). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.). Even if the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605' with conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5, it functions as an antenna that picks up noise. If there is no possibility that it will become a noise source, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, electrically connect the conductive plating to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate elongated in the vertical direction. ' can be configured as Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605'' has the same effect as the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above (that is, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward it.).

Further, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Also, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors vulnerable to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. When configured to include flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power sources are arranged adjacent to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the power supply should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness (diameter) of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows in the flat conductor that supplies power, short circuiting of the flexible flat cable 1606 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit or overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring grooves according to the second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248(c), 251 and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity, and has a U-shaped cross section that is long in the vertical direction. A groove portion 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting outward upward and downward are formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section and are integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed on the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and mounting holes 1608bb are formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. It is A wiring insertion notch 1608d is formed in the substantially central portion of the left side wall of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section as viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded with a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded with a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 has a thickness of 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 has a height of 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. be.

Mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surfaces 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, respectively. After each mounting boss hole 1601d is inserted, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. ), in a state in which a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 are connected to the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover member 1601 contacts with the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b. Further, when the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the payout base unit 550 described above. By being blocked by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an inner groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. FIG.

In addition, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surfaces of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove part 1608a, and the L-shaped shape of the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surfaces of the left and right side walls of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction), have the same height. In addition, the height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the inner groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is equal to the height of the outer groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. and the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the inner groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , is added to the length.

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wires are routed, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 has non-conductivity. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shielding member capable of preventing intrusion into the space in the groove formed by .

For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC stands for Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A plurality of flat conductors are arranged parallel to each other and covered with an insulator. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and is important for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub effect display device (not shown). If it is affected by electromagnetic wave noise, troubles such as disturbance of the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) or a sandstorm-like image may occur.

Therefore, a shield wire 1610 woven in a mesh pattern is provided on one of the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609, and a special structure is adopted in which the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the substrate to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and is also connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the substrate to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. ground (GND)).

When the flexible flat cable 1609 is formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times, a wiring insertion notch is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Through the portion 1608d, it is routed into the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, and extends from the portion bent toward the lower end side of the groove space into the groove space by a predetermined distance from the lower end side. The portion extending to the portion is formed such that the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided faces the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface where the flexible flat cable 1609 is provided with the shield wire 1610. The space formed between them (that is, the small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is arranged) is a space that does not face the side of the source of electromagnetic noise, whereas the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected to the shield wire 1610 . The space formed from the surface on which the .

Since the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are formed. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the space where the wiring is routed, is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. is formed to face the

In addition, wiring that supplies various power supplies (including ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created on the power supply board 630 described above has a conductor (single wire or twisted wire) with a circumference of It is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. Even if it is affected, the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is extremely weak, and the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise is less likely to occur.

In the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the groove having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It faces the open side of 1608a. Various power supplies from the power supply substrate 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided.

Various power supplies from the power board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the drawer connector (concave type) on the side of the main frame to the drawer connector (convex type) on the side of the game board 5 via the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 . 5 and various wirings for supplying power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided. The inner groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608. , and is drawn upward along the inner space of the groove, and is drawn from the upper end of the wiring groove 1608 made of resin to various substrates provided on the game board 5 .

In this way, the flexible flat cable 1609, which is a wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is shielded from the wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity in the space through which the wiring passes (the space for routing the wiring). The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the wire 1610 and not provided with the shielded wire 1610 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shielded wire 1610 is provided. By directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, a space is formed between the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left rear surface of the game board 5. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in (wiring routing space).

In addition, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply substrate 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided, the flexible flat wiring, which is wiring for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be arranged coexisting in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 .

The non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment. Various wiring for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a twisted pair cable for transmitting the control signal by the positive side wiring and the negative side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is not possible to use the resin wiring groove 1608 itself to route various wiring through which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub performance display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has a thickness (diameter) about 1/3 to 1/5 of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire, and as described above, it is flexible. The flat cable 1609 has a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 woven in a mesh pattern is provided over one of the flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The flexible flat cable 1609 is directed from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the left upper end side of a strip-shaped main body 1609a having a predetermined width and being long in the horizontal direction. A reinforcing plate 1609ca is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a to reinforce the electrodes 1609ba having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined thickness. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a, and on the front side of the main body 1609a, predetermined electrodes 1609bb Reinforcing plates 1609cb are formed to reinforce the electrodes 1609bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb having a thickness and being exposed.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above, and are also connected to this connector (not shown). While the shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes are formed on the lower end side of the body 1609a. 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, A shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the control substrate via a control substrate connector provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the power supply line and substrate ground (GND) in the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. A decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a bypass capacitor (not shown) for a power supply are mounted between the capacitors, which are called bypass capacitors. are improving their sexuality.

A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Through the wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area. It is drawn around into the space inside the groove, is guided downward along this space inside the groove, is pulled around into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 as it is, and is drawn around the back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is used to display effects on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the game board 5, as described above. A wiring insertion notch formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the device 1600 except for the display area. Through 1608d, it can be routed to the space inside the groove formed in the wiring groove 1608 made of resin. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 has a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the picture-frame-like metal frame. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is provided between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member capable of preventing electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the region through which it passes.

[Modification]
In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape over the entire surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent into a three-dimensional shape by repeatedly mountain-folding and valley-folding a belt-like main body 1606a having a predetermined width and being long in the left-right direction. However, a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape may be provided on one face piece of a short flexible flat cable 1609' in which the belt-like main body 1606a is folded once in the mountains or valleys. For example, when two substrates are placed in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609' provided with a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape between the two substrates can be used. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. FIG. The upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two boards, and the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is connected to the ground (GND) of one of the two boards. It is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other of the two substrates.

In addition, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where the flexible flat cable 1609 is located. Also, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, by combining mountain folds and valley folds of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided in this region can be used as the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The flexible flat cable 1609 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided may face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . In this way, the shield line 1610 is formed in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. The side of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering toward the flexible flat cable 1609 with the shield of the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented from entering electromagnetic wave noise toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shielding wire 1610 .

In addition, the protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the resin wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity were configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 is If it is made of a non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be formed integrally.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via this connector (not shown), and a plurality of flexible flat cables 1609 are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In addition, the shield wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the control substrate via a control substrate connector provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged on both end sides may be electrically connected to the shield wires 1610, respectively. Even with this configuration, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, the control board is connected to the control board through the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) covering the back upper side of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)).

Further, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Also, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly vulnerable to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors susceptible to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. When configured to include flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power sources are arranged adjacent to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the power supply should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness (diameter) of about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit and the overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back-up effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 . Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. Fig. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit seen from the front, Fig. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit seen from the back, and Fig. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit exploded and viewed from behind, FIG. 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chips and the light guide plate, and FIG. 258 is arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED substrate, and an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a). It is a diagram (b) showing a state in which the insertion of the LED board of the flexible flat cable into the connector is normal, and an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing the LED board of the flexible flat cable It is a figure (c) which shows the abnormal state that the insertion to a connector is insufficient. 253 to 256 and 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and the other parts are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings.

[Luminous production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a T-shaped main body attachment portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010, It is guided into the light emitting main body 5010 along the back side of the main body mounting portion 5020, and the control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to the command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above is used for light emitting effect. A flexible flat cable 5030 (FFC) for transmission to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is three-dimensionally formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. The conductor is covered with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emission effect main body 5010 will be described, and the method of assembling the main body attachment portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission effect unit 5000 will be described in order.

[Luminous effect body]
The light emission effect main body 5010 is processed from a circular transparent resin-molded decorative body 5040 and a thin circular transparent resin plate that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 and has a notch in the upper part thereof. A diffuser sheet 5050 to be molded, and a conductor molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part and being housed inside the decorative body 5040 in a state of being arranged on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffuser sheet 5050 . A light plate 5060, an LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof, and a rear opening of the decoration 5040. and a lid body 5080 made of a transparent resin and having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part thereof.

[Decoration body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decoration body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a corresponding to the outer shape of the character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. there is Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer peripheral portion of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed and the entire area of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a have the world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) having a design representing the Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with characters and background patterns, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is illuminated from the front of the light emission effect unit 5000 (that is, pachinko machine 1 A player sitting in front of the decoration 5040 can easily visually recognize it, and the change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 can be communicated to the player.

On the side of the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040, leaving the upper side thereof, there is formed a member accommodation recessed portion 5040b having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part and accommodating the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070. ing. A reverse-arrangement prevention piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being turned upside down and accommodated on the upper left side of the member accommodation recessed portion 5040b when the decoration body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the bottom inner surface of member accommodating recess 5040b toward back surface 5040y of decoration 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. In addition, when viewed from the back of the decorative body 5040, lids for regulating the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 and closing the member accommodation recess 5040b are provided on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodation recess 5040b. Mounting boss holes 5040d for fixing 5080 to the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrude from the bottom inner surface of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the rear surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. (a total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decoration 5040 as viewed from the back, and extend from the back surface 5040y of the decoration 5040 toward the rear for a second distance dimension. (two mounting boss holes 5040e in total).

[LED board]
LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a notch in its upper part is formed with notch 5070a at a position corresponding to reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in member housing recess 5040b of decoration 5040, and decoration 5040 Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on a front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . This LED bare chip (also referred to as "LED element") is enclosed in a package such as a surface-mount type, chip-on-board type, or bullet type, and is an extremely small electronic component. In this embodiment, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 instead of mounting the LED package containing the LED bare chip on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . We adopted a configuration that is directly mounted on the

Methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 include wire bonding and flip chip bonding. It was adopted. In this flip-chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, wires are used to electrically connect the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but bumps are applied to the electrodes of the LED bare chip. is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 . This connecting portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row with a predetermined distance dimension, and five LED rows are arranged in the vertical direction. Six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction on the fifth stage 5070c5 from the bottom, and LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the horizontal direction on the second stage 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth stage 5070c4 from the bottom. , and eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction in the third stage 5070c3 from the bottom.

On the center line of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 in the left-right direction, the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged. The fourth stage, which is one line above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 on the intermediate line that passes through approximately the midpoint between this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is parallel to this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 A row of 5070c4 LEDs is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line passing through approximately the midpoint of this center line and a straight line parallel to this center line and passing through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and parallel to this center line and the straight line described above. 5070c2 of the second stage, which is located one lower than the LED array of the third stage 5070c3. 1 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 is placed on a straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third row 5070c3. The second LED bare chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bare chip 5075 in the LED row of the second row 5070c2 is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 and the fourth row LED bare chip 5075 are arranged. The 7 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c4 are arranged so as not to line up vertically, and the 8 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c3 on the third stage and the 7 LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row 5070c2 on the second stage. The two LED bare chips 5075 are displaced so as not to line up vertically. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the fourth tier 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the second tier 5070c2 are arranged vertically in a row.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5, which is one above the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4, is located on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through holes 5070b. is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower than the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged on the lowest point side of the circumference of the LED substrate 5070 and above one through hole 5070b. It is A straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and 1 from the left of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 The straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance between the 5th LED bare chip 5075 and the 2nd LED bare chip 5075 coincides. A bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the first row 5070c1 is arranged, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c3 and the fifth row 5070c5 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row are arranged so as not to line up vertically, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second LED row 5070c2 and the six LED rows of the first row 5070c1 The LED bare chips 5075 are displaced so as not to line up vertically. On the straight line described above, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the first row 5070c1 are arranged. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third row 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth row 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. The 2nd to 7th six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged vertically in a row.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d for transmitting a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. This connector 5070d is electrically connected by inserting the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 . The upper end side of this flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 and electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emission mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. be done.

A front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and a back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 are coated with a green resist liquid except for various lands and through holes. The entire surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, while the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green. different. The reason why the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that light emitted from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by other members. When returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070 functions as a reflective sheet that can efficiently refract the returning light forward again. This is to allow the 5070x to have it.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by receiving a control signal from the effect drive board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. was In other words, in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled from electronic components for LED control mounted on itself (for example, an IC such as an LED driver or a gradation control driver). A signal was output to the LED substrate 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 . The electronic components for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. FIG. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, an electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) approximately equal to the height of the connector 5070d can be Even if this electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the decoration body 5040 and the lid body 5080 can be used as they are without changing the dimensions. This can contribute to miniaturization of the effect drive board 1720 . Moreover, by configuring in this way, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075 . can also

In addition, although flip chip bonding is used as a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be used instead of flip chip bonding. good.

[Light guide plate]
A light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in the upper part thereof has a cutout portion 5060a formed at a position corresponding to a reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in a member accommodating recessed portion 5040b of the decoration body 5040. In addition, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively.

The rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As shown in FIG. On the rear surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a notch is formed in the upper part so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075 at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as a “semi-cylindrical shape”), and the axis of this semi-cylindrical shape is inclined slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is obliquely inclined. Incident recesses 5060c are formed respectively. The bottom of the incident recess 5060 c does not penetrate the surface 5070 x of the light guide plate 5060 and stays within the light guide plate 5060 . When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 abuts against the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 and is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident concave portion 5060c.

A rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 has a cylindrical flat surface 5060d formed from the opening side of the incident recess 5060c in the section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes to the position of the concentric circle separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in an upper portion of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the cylindrical flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the incident recess 5060c are similar.

On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is concentrically formed beyond a section formed by a flat cylindrical surface 5060d from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylindrical column passes, and A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the central point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes increases. The distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e in the left-right direction is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of the adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (hereinafter referred to as the "block reference distance in the left-right direction. It may be described as "dimension".) On the other hand, the vertical distance dimension of the prism portion 5060e is one lower than the step of the LED bare chip 5075 enclosed in the main incident recess 5060c from the notch portion formed in the upper part of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d. It is the distance dimension to the prism pattern of the final stage passing through the center point of the closest LED bare chip arranged in the next stage (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "vertical block reference distance dimension").

On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, incident concave portions 5060c, a cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and a prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. are formed to form prism surfaces. The horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the horizontal block reference distance dimension, and the vertical distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the vertical block reference distance dimension. Among the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5 The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of each row, the first stage 5070c1 and the sixth LED bare chip 5075 from the left among the LED arrays of the 5th section, the left side of the LED arrays of the second stage 5070c2 and the fourth stage 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075, and 8th LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the third row of LED rows, the horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f does not correspond to the horizontal block reference distance dimension. , the final stage prism pattern is formed to extend to the outer peripheral edge of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060. In FIG.

On the other hand, while a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

In this embodiment, as described above, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED substrate 5070 is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting Surface) A configuration for direct mounting on the 5070x was adopted. As a result, the plate thickness of the light guide plate can be compared with the plate thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, and the surface mount type, chip-on-board type, cannonball type, etc. can be reduced by the depth distance dimension in the package, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emission performance main body 5010 of the light emission performance unit 5000 is ensured to be larger, contributing to the three-dimensional shaping of the light emission performance main body 5010. be able to. Since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the door frame 3 or the like is hit by the player and the impact is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting unit 5000 provided on the game board 5 will not be affected by the impact. By weakening the impact caused by such a pounding, there is a low probability that a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by the impact caused by such a pounding.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is enclosed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip enclosed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) 5070x, but if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not interfere with the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010, a side type can be used instead of the LED bare chip. may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070 x of the LED substrate 5070 . In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the entrance concave portion 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the LED package having a side-type surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces below the incident concave portion 5060c. Go forward to diffusion sheet 5050 .

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 is processed and molded from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a notch in its upper part, and has a notch at a position corresponding to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively. The back surface of the diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with white paint and processed into a pear-skinned surface having fine unevenness. is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The rear surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded of transparent resin. The rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodation concave portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. As shown in FIG. On the rear surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, there are incident recesses at positions corresponding to the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075. 5060c are formed respectively.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as described above, a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line and separated by a predetermined distance dimension. The LED bare chips 5075 in the row of LEDs are enclosed in incident recesses 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060, respectively. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident recess 5060c is illuminated brightly, so that the LEDs in each stage of the LED row enclosed in each incident recess 5060c are more brightly lit than the area where the incident recess 5060c is not formed. The light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 molded of transparent resin and is emitted from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, so that the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident concave portion 5060c is increased. As a result, the regions where the spaces of the incident recesses 5060c exist are arranged like point light sources, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. FIG.

Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a long band shape in the left-right direction coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows of each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying white paint in dots on regions other than these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The part coated with this white paint becomes an opaque area where the rear or front cannot be seen through the diffusion sheet 5050 . Note that the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050 is not coated with any paint.

Specifically, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED board 5070, and the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED board 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to , and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third row 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, corresponding to the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED substrate 5070, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

The vertical distance dimension of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. Each has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 described above. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension. is a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 that is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. is doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimension. is a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 that is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. is doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the horizontal direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c3 is the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes a single prism block 5060f.

In this way, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white strip regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a strip shape that is long in the left-right direction and coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of each row of LEDs. As a result, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the regions where the spaces of each of the incident recesses 5060c exist are like point light sources. You can soften the lighting conditions.

In addition, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and passes through the light guide plate 5060 to the surface ( (Mounting surface) The light returning toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Also, the light emitted from the prism portion 5060e that constitutes the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. In other words, the light emitted from each of the incident recesses 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060, thereby softening the state in which the regions where the spaces of each of the incident recesses 5060c exist emit light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070 and is efficiently emitted forward again. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to the aspect of uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. FIG. This contributes to uniformly illuminating the surface of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050 (the surface 5060x), so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the light emitting effect.

[Lid]
A lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape with a cutout in its upper part has a cutout portion 5080a formed at a position corresponding to a reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in a member accommodating recessed portion 5040b of the decorative body 5040. In addition, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member housing recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, respectively.

The cover 5080 has a plurality of long ventilation holes 5080c aligned vertically and horizontally, and the flexible flat cable 5030 is located at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d is formed through which the .

In addition, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the body mounting portion 5020 are formed on the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 as viewed from the rear, and extend rearward from the rear surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 for a third distance dimension. (two mounting boss holes 5080e in total). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 is the same as the two mounting bosses formed on the left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the above-described light emitting effect main body 5010. It is the same as the outer diameter of the hole 5040e.

[Body mounting part]
The body attachment portion 5020 having a T shape for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part inside the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove formed in each of the side walls facing backward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. and two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforce the base body 5020a along the side walls except the upper and lower sides of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, there are two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010, and the position corresponding to the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080, respectively. In addition, when viewing the base body 5020a from behind, a plurality of metal plates 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c are fixed to the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. mounting boss holes 5020e are formed so as to protrude rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a to have a length of the fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting bosses). hole 5020e). In addition, the outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 described above (upper left and right of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting main body 5010). 5040e) is about two times smaller than the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in .

Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a are formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. In addition, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Also, a metal plate 5020c attached to the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner bottom surface of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are formed respectively.

Further, when viewing the base body 5020a from the rear, the flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed to pass through. In the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, a plurality of through-holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part inside the back box 3010 are formed (not shown).

In addition, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). It is the same ground (GND) as (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is covered with an insulator, and compared to normal round electric wiring, it is about 1/3 to 1/5 the thickness (diameter) of normal round electric wiring. Although not shown, it is three-dimensionally formed by repeating mountain folds and valley folds from the effect drive board 1720 to the light emission effect main body 5010, and furthermore, the main body mounting portion 5020 Along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c and fold into the light emitting effect main body 5010, The main body 5030a is formed three-dimensionally by repeating valley folds a plurality of times, and has a strip-shaped main body 5030a that has a predetermined width and is elongated in the left-right direction. A rectangular conductor electrode having a predetermined length is arranged in an exposed state, and a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a has a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length. While a reinforcing plate is formed to reinforce the main body 5030a, on the lower end side of the main body 5030a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate 5030cb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a to reinforce the rectangular electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb. .

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the effect drive board 1720, while they are formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010.

Between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) on the performance drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is provided. is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, between the power supply line and the substrate ground (GND) in the LED board 5070 of the light emission effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected, a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown), etc. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is three-dimensionally bent and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the back surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so that the flexible flat cable 5030 is placed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, is charged, and discharges static electricity, thereby emitting electromagnetic noise. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof become an environment susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030, which transmits the control signal to the light emitting main body 5010, is vulnerable to noise and is susceptible to problems caused by electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data changes to other data and becomes garbled, or a signal that is not originally output). However, it is likely to be affected by electromagnetic noise, but as described above, near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise There is also a part that is pulled around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "both ends") ) is used as a ground (GND) line as a power supply line so that the power supply lines are arranged together. As a result, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes, the electrodes other than the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the end are removed from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the electrode of the flat conductor on both sides of the end. By arranging a ground (GND) line between the source of electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge and other electrodes (electrodes containing control signals) other than the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end, It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to other electrodes (electrodes including lines for transmitting control signals) other than the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end. .

In addition, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are used as power supply lines so that the power supply lines are arranged together. A power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is arranged on the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides. A power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is highly noise-resistant and not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise, so it can be arranged in electrodes close to the electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides of the extreme end, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one extreme side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other extreme side or both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one endmost side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other endmost side.

Further, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are both used as ground (GND) lines. However, in the part that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, two metal L-shaped plates are placed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting main body 5010. 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c. That is, the flexible flat cable 503 is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c at the portion that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. , the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so it is mounted on various decorative substrates provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED itself, the light leaking out to the rear of the back unit 3000 is suppressed as much as possible, contributing to the reduction of the effect of the lighting effect of the light emitted by the LED. be.

[Modification]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the end are both connected to the power line. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so as to be arranged, a power supply line (for example, a +5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because a power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides of the extreme end, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one extreme side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other extreme side A ground (GND) line is arranged on one of the two or both of the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the one endmost side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on the other endmost side. ing.

Also, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the flat conductor electrodes on both sides of the extreme end are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. 5020 along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the 5020 so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. may be made. In this way, the flexible flat cable 503 is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b. Shielded by 5020b, it can contribute to the improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but a flat conductor electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. may be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal.

Also, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic noise). For flat conductors for transmission (hereafter referred to as "flat conductors vulnerable to electromagnetic noise"), connect the substrate ground (GND) and the electrical The flat conductors that are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are sandwiched between the flat conductors that are vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic wave noise. may In this way, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of the electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals arranged in parallel. When configured to include flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) and flat conductors supplying various power sources, the substrate ground (GND) and the power sources are arranged adjacent to each other. When the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the power supply should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current due to a sudden increase in resistance, or an overcurrent protection element that has a small resistance below the rated current and cuts An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current is reached (for example, a circuit with a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. This polyswitch has a relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, and the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature. This heat causes the main body to generate heat, and this heat reduces the conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools, the conductivity returns and returns. It is preferable to This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness (diameter) about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electric wire. Therefore, when an overcurrent flows in the flat conductor that supplies power, short circuiting of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented by the overcurrent protection circuit or overcurrent protection circuit to ensure safety and prevent damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a method for assembling the lighting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d. A lid body 5080 is arranged to cover the accommodation recess 5040b. In this state, the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are arranged on the same plane and become flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse arrangement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are aligned with the lid. The above-described first distance dimension is set in advance such that it does not protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and is located between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 . Then, a metal round head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the rear surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d to fix it. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decoration 5040 when the decoration 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are inserted into a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. A pan head screw is screwed from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end face of the mounting boss hole 5020e does not protrude from the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the back side of the metal plate 5020c, and the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are not protruded from the front and back sides. The above-described fourth distance dimension is set in advance so as to fall between .

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080 into the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. FIG. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020 f formed in the main body attachment portion 5020 . A method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED substrate 5070 will be described later.

Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in alignment with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed in the rear surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed in the rear surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e, 5080e. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and are fitted between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. A second distance dimension and a third distance dimension are preset.

Next, the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body attachment part 5020 between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. The assembly of the light emission effect unit 5000 is completed by drawing it around so as to pass through.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a plurality of light-emitting means are arranged in the front frame or the game board (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-202333 (paragraph [0018], paragraph [0039], FIG. 1 , and FIG. 2)). By the way, when the light emitting effect by the decoration is performed by the light emission of the light emitting means, the position of the light emitting means may cause the player to feel uncomfortable because the position of the light emitting means shines on the decoration like a point light source.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method for attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 and inserted all the way. electrically connected.

When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb A contact failure may occur between the electrodes 5030bb and the corresponding electrodes of the connector 5070d.

Therefore, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, as shown in FIG. Near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to serve as a mark for normal insertion. A long solid line guideline G4U linearly extending in the left-right direction (upper and outer side), and a lower vicinity of a position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guideline G4L linearly extending in the left-right direction toward the vicinity of the corresponding position (bottom outside), and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V extending linearly matching the straight line in the vertical direction of the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb is printed by silk printing.

No through-hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. Even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is not flat. This is to prevent the conductor from short-circuiting due to the through-hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, while the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the left edge 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship in which they overlap each other in the vertical direction. If the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted deep into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the insertion amount ( 259(c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is separated from the guideline G4V by the insertion shortage SRT. In this way, on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode 5030bb is normally inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted deep into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a covers the guideline G4U extending linearly in the horizontal direction and cannot be visually recognized, and the lower side of the lower end of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the horizontal direction. It becomes a state having an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. In this way, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U and G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It is possible to easily visually determine whether or not the connector 5070d is normally inserted all the way to the back. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, an operator attaches a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. When inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether the electrode 5030bb is properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the efficiency improvement of the confirmation work.

[Modification]
In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left and right direction. Although a long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly to and is printed by silk printing, the inside of a rectangular area having the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side may be solidly printed by silk printing. . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solid rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed by rubbing the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is exposed without being exposed by preventing the resist from peeling off due to the silk printing in the solid rectangular area being peeled off. It is possible to prevent the flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the horizontal direction. A long solid line guideline G4L that extends linearly to and is printed by silk printing. (Solder surface) A foil extraction area may be formed on the copper foil surface of 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the foil-punched rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Even if it is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, so it is possible to prevent the flat conductors of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from shorting. can.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the lower side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower outer side of the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the horizontal direction. A long solid line guideline G4L that extends linearly to and is printed by silk printing. , G4L may be formed, and guidelines G4U and G4L may be formed by not applying the resist solution to a part of the area when applying the resist solution to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. may

Further, after a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are normally inserted into the connector 5070d, the flexible flat cable The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is disconnected from the connector 5070d, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, Each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d are diagonally displaced and contact other adjacent electrodes to prevent short circuits. A fixing seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction may be attached. In this case, on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, as the area where the fixing seal is attached, a square bracket (") shape is formed, for example, at a position slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixing seal. (It may be a figure such as a line or a symbol.) Guidelines may be formed by printing by silk printing, or the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 may be formed. A guideline in the form of brackets (“) (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by removing the , or a resist solution may be applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution, a bracket (“)-shaped guideline (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed. The flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the LED substrate by a fixed seal. By being fixed to the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of 50700, the posture of flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

In addition, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U and the vicinity of the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left and right direction. A long solid line guideline G4L extending linearly to the left edge side 5030cba of a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V that extends linearly and matches the straight line is formed on the LED board 5070, but a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used instead of the solid line, and the guidelines G4U and G4L are inserted. It may be an arrow line indicating the direction, or an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for the guideline G4V.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, a game can be played. 249. A wire routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wire groove 1605 and a wire routed in the space inside the groove formed by the metal wire groove 1605 in FIG. 249 are provided as the second wiring member. The metal wiring groove 1605 is conductive, and the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove formed by .theta.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on the bottom inner surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 250, which is the other side of the conductive member that does not face the side of the electromagnetic noise source, and has a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. A wiring routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged on the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove 1605a.

In this way, the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member, is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove is located on the bottom inner surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, is weaker in the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring arranged in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed in the formed space outside the groove is the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 not facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side. By being arranged on the outer surface 1605d, in the space affected by electromagnetic wave noise, the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, and the second wiring member A wiring routed in a groove space formed by a certain metal wiring groove 1605 can be arranged in a mixed manner. Therefore, it is possible to improve noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a mackerel ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has a function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 via the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side portion opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The electrostatic removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them have decorative plating on the entire surface. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also accommodates a setting change board 1311 on which setting key switches 1311a capable of changing setting values are mounted. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch can be set. 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004 . The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 has a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above may be mounted.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotating bodies, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decoration boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 3000 back unit 3100 back rear effect unit 3110 back rear movable decoration 3111 decoration (decoration member, decoration plate)
3111a first decorative protrusion 3111d metal decorative portion 3112 decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a body portion 3113b flange portion (peripheral wall portion)
3113c First LED housing portion 3113d Second LED housing portion 3113e Reflecting portion 3114 Back rear decoration substrate (decoration substrate)
3114a first LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Substrate main body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative body base 3115a Coating plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing games,
a conductive member;
a first wiring member that is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise;
a second wiring member that is more resistant to electromagnetic wave noise than the first wiring member;
with
The second wiring member is disposed on one surface of the conductive member facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side, and the first wiring member is disposed on the other surface of the conductive member not facing the electromagnetic noise generation source side. to place the
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images